Portfolio by Stacey Williams

BUSCHMAN HOUSE OVERVIEW: 427 Buschman st., Hattiesburg MS, 39154 The purpose of this house project was to create a comfortable 1200 square foot living space for $100,000 that would support a low income family consisting of a single mother, her small child, and her elderly parent with mobile disabilities all while incorporating green strategies, universal design principles, and maintaining the architectural appeal of the Newman Buschman Historical district of Hattiesburg.

Green Strategies

ADA Strategies

 Insulation: Cellulose R-38

 1:12 Ramp

Tech shield Roof Decking

Walk-in shower

Low E Vinyl Windows

Grab bars around toilet

Window seal

42” wide hallways

Low flow toilet HVAC: SEER 14.5 4-ton AC/Gas Furnace Programmable Digital Thermometer Tankless Water Heater Motion Sensor Front Porch Light Energy Star Appliances

Site Plan

Left Side

Terrazo Countertops

Floor Plan

Cork Flooring

Front

Right Side

Bookstore Program Summary Designer: Stacey Williams

Objective: Develop a building that holds a bookstore, coffee shop, and bar

Space Relations:

The bookstore will take up 2/3 of the first floor. Most of that space will be filled with book shelves and magazine racks. A space for P.O.S and storage will also need to be at the front or South side of the store. The North side of the first floor will be dedicated to the elevator, managerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s office, bathrooms, and a sitting area. This sitting area will be filled with tables and chairs that will create a good working environment for students that donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t want to be completely isolated from a social setting while studying. Small living room areas with comfortable furniture will also be set up for more space to curl up with a good book or talk with friends. The second floor will have a full coffee shop and bar. A stage area will be built for musical performances and more seating areas will be provided. The first floor will be taller than the second floor to make space for an indoor balcony on the first floor and give the second floor a more intimate and cozy feeling. Functional Responsibilities Personnel:

Two managers will be appointed for this building. One for the bookstore and another for the coffee shop and bar

Flexibility and expandability:

There is no space on this lot for external growth. The building structure allows for interior walls to be changes so that the space ratios can be changed

Special Equipment and Systems :    

Commercial Refrigerators Elevator Commercial Espresso Machines Cash registers

Site Requirements:

The front setback of the building has to be a minimum of thirty (30) feet. The side setbacks require a minimum of fifteen (15) feet on one side, and no side yard required on the other side. However, the structure cannot have any windows or doors opening on the side unless there is a minimum ten (10) foot side yard setback. All structures must meet the Fire Code. On a corner lot, the side yard abutting a street right-of-way shall be minimum of thirty (30) feet. No building or structure shall exceed three (3) stories in height. Code Research SECTION 303 ASSEMBLY GROUP A

303.1 Assembly Group A. Assembly Group A occupancy includes, among others, the use of a building or structure, or a portion thereof, for the gathering of persons for purposes such as civic, social or religious functions; recreation, food or drink consumption or awaiting transportation. A-2 Assembly uses intended for food and/or drink consumption including, but not limited to: Banquet halls Night clubs

Restaurants Taverns and bars SECTION 309 MERCANTILE GROUP M 309.1 Mercantile Group M. Mercantile Group M occupancy includes, among others, the use of a building or structure or a portion thereof, for the display and sale of merchandise and involves stocks of goods, wares or merchandise incidental to such purposes and accessible to the public. Mercantile occupancies shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Department stores Drug stores Markets Motor fuel-dispensing facilities Retail or wholesale SECTION 503 GENERAL BUILDING HEIGHT AND AREA LIMITATIONS 503.1 General. The building height and area shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 503 based on the type of construction as determined by Section 602 and the occupancies as determined by Section 302 except as modified hereafter. Each portion of a building separated by one or more fire walls complying with Section 706 shall be considered to be a separate building.

TABLE 503 ALLOWABLE BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREASa Building height limitations shown in feet above grade plane. Story limitations shown as stories above grade plane. Building area limitations shown in square feet, as determined by the definition of â&#x20AC;&#x153;Area, building,â&#x20AC;? per story

A-2

Height Stories Area (SF)

Type III A B 65 ft. 55ft. 3 2 14000 9500

Stories Area (SF)

4 18000

2 12500

508.3.2 Allowable building area and height. The allowable building area and height of the building or portion thereof shall be based on the most restrictive allowances for the occupancy groups under consideration for the type of construction of the building in accordance with Section 503.1.

Room Name Book Store Study Area Balcony Womens Restroom Mens Restroom Stairs Stairs Coffee Shop Second Floor Corridor Storage Bar Elevator Mech. Womens Restroom Mens Restroom Grand total:

Room Program Area (SF) sqft. Per Occupant Occupancy 1956 100 19.56 1215 15 81 223 15 14.8666667 166 1 166 162 1 162 198 142 961 200 4.805 100 725 300 2.41666667 2270 15 151.333333 70 160 130 120 8598

601.981667

SECTION 00 01 01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE BOOK STORE COFFEE SHOP AND BAR STACEY WILLIAMS SENIOR PROJECTS II W556981 END OF PROJECT TITLE PAGE

2012 / StaceyW

00 01 01 - 1

PROJECT TITLE PAGE

SECTION 00 01 02 PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A.

Project Name: Bookstore, located at Hardy Street.

Project Number: 2012.

The Owner, hereinafter referred to as Owner: __________.

Owner's Project Manager: Architect.

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A.

Summary Project Description: _____.

Contract Scope: Construction, demolition, renovation, hazardous material removal, site acquisition, construction financing, and facility operations during occupancy.

Contract Terms: Lump sum (fixed price, stipulated sum), with incentives.

Estimated Contract Amount: _____.

1.03 PROCUREMENT TIMETABLE A.

Contract Time: _____ calendar days.

Desired Construction Start: Not later than _____.

Desired Substantial Completion Date: Not later than ____ calendar days from Notice to Proceed.

Desired Final Completion Date: Not later than ____ calendar days from Notice to Proceed.

Completion date is critical due to requirements of Owner's operations.

1.04 PRE-QUALIFIED BIDDERS A.

Those already qualified to submit bids are: 1. Design-Builder: _______. 2. Design-Builder: _______. 3. Design-Builder: _______. 4. General Contractor: _______. 5. General Contractor: _______. 6. General Contractor: _______.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

00 01 02 - 1

PROJECT INFORMATION

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A.

00 01 01 - Project Title Page

00 01 02 - Project Information

00 01 10 - Table of Contents

00 40 00 - Procurement Forms and Supplements

00 50 00 - Contracting Forms and Supplements

00 52 00 - Agreement Form

00 71 00 - Contracting Definitions

SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.

01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures

01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements

01 30 50 - Design Procedures and Substantiation Requirements

01 31 14 - Facility Services Coordination

01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule

01 35 14 - LEED Credit Summary

01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures

01 35 53 - Security Procedures

01 40 00 - Quality Requirements

01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements

01 42 19 - Reference Standards

01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections

M. 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls N.

01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities

01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control

01 60 00 - Product Requirements

01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions

01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements

01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal

01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals

01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training

01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements

W. 01 91 14 - Commissioning Authority Responsibilities 2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE A.

03 01 00 - Maintenance of Concrete

03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories

03 11 19 - Insulating Concrete Forms

03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing

2012 / StaceyW

00 01 10 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY A.

04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting

04 20 01 - Masonry Veneer

04 43 01 - Stone Masonry Veneer

2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A.

05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing

05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing

05 31 00 - Steel Decking

05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing

05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications

05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings

2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A.

06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry

06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework

2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A.

07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing

07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation

07 21 19 - Foamed-In-Place Insulation

07 25 00 - Weather Barriers

07 71 00 - Roof Specialties

07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts

2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A.

08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors

08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows

08 71 00 - Door Hardware

2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A.

09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation

09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings

09 62 29 - Cork Flooring

09 90 00 - Painting and Coating

2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A.

10 14 00 - Signage

2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT A.

11 40 00 - Foodservice Equipment

2012 / StaceyW

00 01 10 - 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING A.

22 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment

2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) A.

23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

23 08 00 - Commissioning of HVAC

23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings

2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL A.

26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices

26 51 00 - Interior Lighting

26 55 61 - Theatrical Lighting

2.19 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS 2.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK A.

31 09 16.21 - Pile Load Tests

31 10 00 - Site Clearing

31 22 00 - Grading

2.22 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS A.

32 92 23 - Sodding

32 93 00 - Plants

2.23 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES A.

33 41 11 - Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

2012 / StaceyW

00 01 10 - 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 40 00 PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A VALID LICENSE TO USE ALL COPYRIGHTED DOCUMENTS SPECIFIED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL. 1.02 FORMS A.

Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the procurement requirements.

Instructions to Bidders: AIA A701.

Substitution Request Form (During Procurement): _______.

Bid Form: Section 00 41 00.

Procurement Form Supplements:

Representations and Certifications:

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AIA A701 - Instructions to Bidders; 1997.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW SUPPLEMENTS

00 40 00 - 1

PROCUREMENT FORMS AND

SECTION 00 50 00 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A VALID LICENSE TO USE ALL COPYRIGHTED DOCUMENTS SPECIFIED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL. 1.02 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A.

See Section 00 52 00 for the Agreement form to be executed.

See Section 00 72 00 for the General Conditions.

The Agreement is based on AIA A101.

The General Conditions are based on AIA A201.

The Supplementary Conditions include AIA A201SC.

1.03 FORMS A.

Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Bond Forms:

Post-Award Certificates and Other Forms: 1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703. 2. Application for Payment Form: AIA G702 and G703.

Clarification and Modification Forms: 1. Supplemental Instruction Form: AIA G710. 2. Construction Change Directive Form: AIA G714. 3. Change Order Form: AIA G701.

Closeout Forms: 1. Certificate of Substantial Completion Form: AIA G704.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AIA A101 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum; 2007.

AIA A201 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; 2007.

AIA A201SC - Federal Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction; 1999.

AIA G701 - Change Order; 2001.

AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment; 1992.

AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet; 1992.

AIA G704 - Certificate of Substantial Completion; 2000.

AIA G710 - Architect's Supplemental Instructions; 1992.

AIA G714 - Construction Change Directive; 2007.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW SUPPLEMENTS

00 50 00 - 1

CONTRACTING FORMS AND

SECTION 00 52 00 AGREEMENT FORM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FORM OF AGREEMENT 1.02 THE AGREEMENT TO BE EXECUTED IS ATTACHED FOLLOWING THIS PAGE. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF AGREEMENT

2012 / StaceyW

00 52 00 - 1

AGREEMENT FORM

SECTION 00 71 00 CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY: THESE DEFINITIONS ARE INTEGRAL TO THE AGREEMENT. 1.02 DEFINITIONS - DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENTS A.

Contract Documents: As defined in the Conditions of the Contract and as follows: 1. At the time of execution of the Agreement, the Contract Documents consist of the following: a. The Agreement and Conditions of the Contract, and other documents listed on the Table of Contents under the heading Contracting Requirements. b. The Conceptual Documents. c. The Proposal and Proposal Exhibits, except for provisions that contradict the requirements of the Conceptual Documents and that are not specifically accepted by the Owner by means of written Modification prior to execution of the Agreement. 2. From time to time after execution of the Agreement, upon approval by the Owner, the following types of documents will be incorporated into the Contract Documents: a. Drawings and other documents documenting the design. b. Construction drawings and specifications detailing the execution of the design.

Conceptual Documents: The following documents: 1. The Project Program. 2. The Design Criteria, sections identified with the prefix "DC". 3. Detailed Specifications.

Project Program: The Owner's requirements for size, arrangement, organization, and location of functional spaces , description of space functions , identification of fittings, equipment, and furnishings , description of the physical and environmental requirements for each space , together with a description of the image, goals, or "mission" of the project. 1. Project Program: The project program , entitled _____, is attached.

Proposal: The Proposal Form and Exhibits, which comprise the information prepared by the prospective Design-Builder to show their method of complying with the Conceptual Documents.

1.03 DEFINITIONS - TIME PERIODS AND MILESTONE DATES A.

Proposal: The time period during which prospective Proposers prepare their Proposals. 1. Substantiation specified to occur during the Proposal period are intended to accompany the Proposal. 2. The Proposal period ends on the date specified for submission of Proposals.

Preliminary Design: The time period during which the design criteria are finalized and preliminary drawings and written descriptions are prepared to illustrate the proposed design of the work or a portion of the work to the Owner , as described in the Conditions of the Contract.

Design Development: The time period during which the form, arrangement, size, and materials of the work or a portion of the work are determined , as described in the Conditions of the Contract. 1. The end of the Design Development period occurs before the beginning of preparation of construction documents.

Construction Documents: The time period during which process working drawings, specifications, and other documents describing the work or a portion of the work are prepared in sufficient detail to allow accurate and complete construction. 1. The end of the Construction Documents period is the time at which all portions of the Construction Documents are complete.

Construction: The time period from the beginning of work on the project site until final payment as defined by the Conditions of the Contract.

2012 / StaceyW

00 71 00 - 1

CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS

Substantial Completion: The date as defined in the Conditions of the Contract. The date of substantial completion is the due date for the following: 1. Design-Builder's complete punchlist of items to be completed. 2. Owner's complete punchlist of items to be completed. 3. Compliance with requirements of governing authorities, for submittals, inspections, and permits. 4. Compliance with Owner's requirements for access to areas occupied by the Owner.

Closeout: The time period during which all details of both construction and commissioning are completed. 1. The Closeout period is the time from the Date of Substantial Completion until final payment , both as defined by the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Before and during the Closeout period, the Owner will ascertain whether the completed project complies with the the Contract Documents.

Occupancy: The time period during which the project is occupied for its intended purpose. 1. The Occupancy period begins at the Date of Substantial Completion , as defined by the Conditions of the Contract. 2. Move-in will occur before the end of the Closeout period. 3. Owner is responsible for operation and maintenance of the project during the Occupancy period , unless specifically indicated otherwise for certain items. 4. Design-Builder is responsible for operation and maintenance of the project until the end of the Closeout period.

Correction Period: The time period defined by the Conditions of the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

00 71 00 - 2

CONTRACTING DEFINITIONS

SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 00 50 00 - Contracting Forms and Supplements: Forms to be used.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.

Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval.

Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A.

Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval.

Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.

Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 20 00 - 1

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE A.

All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format. 4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants will be permitted to use the service at no extra charge. 5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software capability is provided by the service provider. 6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be reviewed. 7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts.

Cost: The cost of the service will be paid by Owner.

Submittal Service: The selected service is: 1. Submittal Exchange (tel: 1-800-714-0024): www.submittalexchange.com.

Training: One, one-hour, web-based training session will be arranged for all participants, with representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of the user of the service.

Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A.

Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals.

Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.

Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

2012 / StaceyW

01 30 00 - 1

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

8. 9. 10. 11. E.

Planned progress during succeeding work period. Maintenance of quality and work standards. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. Other business relating to Work.

Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A.

When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification.

Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A.

When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated.

Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken.

3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A.

When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated.

Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.06 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A.

Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.

Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.

Transmit each submittal with approved form.

Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

2012 / StaceyW

01 30 00 - 2

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.

Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.

For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.

Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 30 00 - 3

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 30 50 DESIGN PROCEDURES AND SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Procedures for design of the facility, based on the design criteria specified.

Substantiation requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A.

Substantiation: All forms of evidence that are used to predict whether the design will comply with the requirements or to verify that the construction based on the design actually does comply. During Preliminary Design, Design Development, and Construction Documents, requirements to submit substantiation are primarily intended to forestall use of designs or constructions that will not comply. At any time before completion of construction, substantiation is presumed to be only a prediction and may subsequently be invalidated by actual results. The term substantiation is used to distinguish these forms of evidence from traditional submittals commonly required during the construction phase.

Proven-In-Use: Proven to comply by having actually been built to the same or very similar design with the same materials as proposed and functioning as specified.

Proven-by-Mock-Up: Compliance reasonably predictable by having been tested in full-scale mock-up using the same materials and design as proposed and functioning as specified. Testing need not have been accomplished specifically for this project; when published listings of independent agencies include details of testing and results, citation of test by listing number is sufficient (submittal of all test details is not required).

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A.

Substantiation Submittal Procedures: 1. Time Frames: As specified. If there is a conflict between the degree of detail or completion specified and the progress of the design or construction, obtain a clarification before submitting. 2. Recipient: Owner's project manager , at ______. 3. Number of Copies: 2 copies for Owner's use and records; Owner will return not more than one additional copy. 4. For time periods that constitute Milestones, all substantiation submittals required during that period must be complete and accepted before the Milestone can be considered achieved. 5. Resubmissions: Clearly identified as such, with all changes made since the original submittal clearly marked.

Owner's Review of Substantiation: Unless otherwise indicated, Owner will make formal acceptance of substantiation submittals. 1. If a submittal is not acceptable Owner will notify Design-Builder promptly. 2. Allow minimum of 15 working days for review of major "end of period" submittals.

Substantiation Schedule: Prepare and maintain a complete schedule of substantiation items, showing: 1. Contents, for each item: a. Anticipated and actual item, with Section and paragraph number and drawing identification, if any. b. Anticipated submittal date, or time period(s) during which submittal is required. c. Actual submittal date. d. Action taken or other status.

2012 / StaceyW SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS

01 30 50 - 1

DESIGN PROCEDURES AND

2. 3. 4. 5.

e. Identification of future re-submission requirement, if any. If desired, schedule may be incorporated into overall progress schedule, provided substantiation data can be reported separately from other progress information. Submission: To Owner, within 30 days after notice to proceed. Form: Computer database format for Owner's use in tracking submittals; database structured so Owner's added information will not be overwritten or deleted by incorporation of updated data from Design-Builder. Updates: To Owner, monthly in hard copy.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Qualifications of Testing/Inspection Agencies Performing Substantiation: 1. Qualified and equipped to perform applicable tests/inspection. 2. Regularly engaged in testing and inspection activities on a commercial basis. 3. Independent of Design-Builder and his contractors' organizations. 4. Authorized to operate in the State in which the project is located. 5. Acceptable to Owner. 6. Substantiation: Submittal of qualifications, based on ASTM E329.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.

Owner-furnished products for this project are:

Owner will arrange for and deliver shop drawings and other submittals, arrange and pay for delivery to site, perform joint inspection after delivery, submit claims for transportation damage, replace items damaged prior to delivery, replace defective items, and arrange for manufacturer inspections, service, and warranties.

2.02 DESIGN-BUILDER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.

In addition to requirements specified in other sections, provide products and elements that comply with the following.

Where "no substitutions" is indicated, use only the product (or one of the products) specified.

Elements Made Up of More Than One Product: 1. Where an element is specified by performance criteria, use construction either proven-in-use or proven-by-mock-up, unless otherwise indicated. a. The Design-Builder may choose whether to use elements proven-in-use or proven-by-mock-up, unless either option is indicated as specifically required. b. Where test methods accompany performance requirements, use those test methods to test the mock-up. 2. Where a type of product is specified, without performance criteria specifically applicable to the element, use the type of product specified. 3. Where more than one type of product is specified, without performance criteria specifically applicable to the element, use one of the types of products specified. 4. Where a type of product is specified, with applicable performance criteria, use either the type of product specified or another type of product that meets the performance criteria as proven-in-use or proven-by-mock-up. 5. Where more than one type of product is specified, with applicable performance criteria, use either one of the types of products specified or another type of product that meets the performance criteria as proven-in-use or proven-by-mock-up. 6. Where neither types of products nor performance criteria are specified, use products that will perform well within the specified life span of the building.

Products: 1. Where a product is specified only by a manufacturer name and model number/brand name, use only that model/brand product. 2. Where the properties of a product are specified by description and/or with performance criteria, use products that comply with the description and/or performance criteria.

2012 / StaceyW SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS

01 30 50 - 2

DESIGN PROCEDURES AND

3. E.

Where manufacturers are listed for a particular product, use a product made by one of those manufacturers that also complies with other requirements.

Reference Standards: Where products or workmanship is specified by reference to a document not included in the Contract Documents, comply with the requirements of the document, except where more stringent requirements are specified. 1. Date of Issue: As indicated in each instance except where a specific date is established by code.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A.

During Preliminary Design, the design criteria and the design itself must be refined, finalized, and documented.

Owner will appoint representatives of the following departments to provide details of functional needs: 1. User groups. 2. Operations staff. 3. Maintenance staff.

Design Documentation: Record all design and performance criteria that will be of use during occupancy and operation of the project, including all items specified for maintenance manuals, below. 1. Design Criteria Documentation Included in Construction Documents: Organized logically (from the point of view of operations staff) and placed in a prominent location in drawing sets. 2. If desired, documentation may consist of annotated modifications to and amplification of the Conceptual Documents, with changes that affect Contract Times or Contract Price documented as required for modifications. 3. If required, shop drawings may be used to accomplish design documentation. 4. Owner will maintain the project program document, modified to reflect changes made during refinement of the design. 5. Drawings: Prepared using AutoCAD R14, using Owner's specified drawing and layering conventions. 6. Shop Drawings: Prepared using same CAD software. 7. Mock-Ups: Where necessary to clarify design intent and obtain approvals, .

3.02 PERFORMANCE OF SUBSTANTIATION A.

In addition to the requirements stated in other sections, provide the following substantiation of compliance at each stage of the project: 1. If a substantiation requirement is specified without an indication of when it is to be submitted, submit or execute it before the end of Construction Documents.

Submit complete sets of documents containing all substantiation at end of the following periods: 1. Proposal period. 2. Preliminary Design period. 3. Design Development period. 4. Construction Documents period.

Proven-In-Use: Where elements proven-in-use are used to comply with performance requirements: 1. In the Proposal, identify which elements will be accomplished using proven-in-use elements. 2. During Design Development, identify proven-in-use elements proposed for use, including building name, location, date of construction, owner contact, and description of design and materials in sufficient detail to enable reproduction in this project.

Proven-By-Mockup: Where elements proven-by-mock-up are used to comply with performance requirements:

2012 / StaceyW SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS

01 30 50 - 3

DESIGN PROCEDURES AND

1. 2. 3.

In the Proposal, identify which elements will be accomplished using proven-by-mock-up elements. During Design Development, identify proven-by-mock-up elements proposed for use, with test report including date and location of test, name of testing agency, and description of test and mock-up. Mock-up testing need not have been performed specifically for this project, provided the mock-up is substantially similar in design and construction to the element proposed.

Design Analyses (including Engineering Calculations): 1. Where a design analysis or calculation is specified without identifying a particular method, perform analysis in accordance with accepted engineering or scientific principles to show compliance with specified requirements, and submit report that includes analysis methods used and the name and qualifications of the designer. 2. Where engineering design is allowed to be completed after commencement of construction, substantiation may be in the form of shop drawings or other data. 3. Submit design analyses at the end of Design Development unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where design analysis is specified to be performed by licensed design professional, use a design professional licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

Substantiation for Products: 1. Where actual brand name products are not identified by either the Owner or the Design-Builder, identify the products to be used. 2. In the Proposal: a. Identify one or more product types for each system, assembly, or element. b. For each product type, provide brief descriptive or performance specifications. c. For major manufactured products that are commonly purchased by brand name, and any other products so indicated, identify at least one manufacturer that will be used. 3. During Preliminary Design or Design Development: a. Where more than one product type is identified for a particular system, assembly, or element, identify exactly which type will be used. b. For each product type, provide descriptive or performance specifications; early submittals may be brief specifications, but complete specifications are required prior to completion of construction documents. c. For each product type, identify at least one manufacturer that will be used. d. For major manufactured products that are commonly purchased by brand name, and any other products so indicated, provide manufacturer's product literature on at least one actual brand name product that meets the specifications, including performance data and sample warranty. 4. During Construction: a. Identify actual brand name products used for every product, except commodity products specified by performance or description. b. Where a product is specified by performance requirements with test methods, and if so specified, provide test reports showing compliance. c. Provide manufacturer's product literature for each brand name product. d. Provide the manufacturer's certification that the product used on the project complies with the contract documents. 5. Before End of Closeout: a. Provide copies of all manufacturer warranties that extend for more than one year after completion.

Regardless of whether substantiation is specified or not, the actual construction must comply with the specified requirements and may, at the Owner's discretion, be examined, inspected, or tested to determine compliance. 1. Substantiation submittals will not be approved or accepted, except to the extent that they are part of documents required to be approved or accepted in order to proceed to the next stage of design or construction. However, approval or acceptance of substantiation will not

2012 / StaceyW SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS

01 30 50 - 4

DESIGN PROCEDURES AND

constitute approval or acceptance of deviations from the specified requirements unless those deviations are specifically identified as such on the submittal. The Owner accepts the responsibility to review substantiation submittals in a timely manner and to respond if they are unacceptable.

3.03 FIELD TESTING AND INSPECTION AS SUBSTANTIATION A.

Perform all testing , observation, and inspection required by code and as specified.

Reports: Written report of each test/inspection; including complete details of conditions, methods, and results, signed by responsible individual. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW SUBSTANTIATION REQUIREMENTS

01 30 50 - 5

DESIGN PROCEDURES AND

SECTION 01 31 14 FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR A.

Employ and pay for services of a person, technically qualified and administratively experienced in field coordination of the type of work required to be coordinated, for the duration of the Work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A.

Submit name, address, and telephone number of coordinator and name of principal officer for review.

Submit coordination drawings and schedules prior to submitting shop drawings, product data, and samples.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION REQUIRED A.

Coordinate the work listed below: 1. Fire Suppression: Division 21. 2. Plumbing: Division 22. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Division 23. 4. Integrated Automation: Division 25. 5. Electrical: Division 26. 6. Communications: Division 27. 7. Electronic Safety and Security: Division 28. 8. Site Utilities: Division 33.

Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of products.

Conduct meetings among subcontractors and others concerned, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute.

Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of meetings and reports to concerned parties.

3.02 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A.

Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination with related work. Transmit copies of reviewed documents to Architect.

Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents.

3.03 COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS A.

Review proposals and requests for substitution prior to submission to Architect.

Submit with recommendation for action.

3.04 OBSERVATION OF WORK 3.05 DOCUMENTATION A.

Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record: 1. Specification section number and product name. 2. Name of Contractor, subcontractor, and ________. 3. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. 4. Name of manufacturer's representative present. 5. Date, time, and duration of tests. 6. Type of test, and results. 7. Retesting required.

Submit copies of documentation to Architect upon request.

2012 / StaceyW

01 31 14 - 1

FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION

3.06 EQUIPMENT START-UP A.

Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operable condition as required by Section 01 70 00.

3.07 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT A.

Prior to inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, and ready for operation.

Assist Architect with review. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 31 14 - 2

FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION

SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A.

Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.

Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review.

Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.

Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A.

Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.

3.02 CONTENT A.

Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

Identify each item by specification section number.

Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.

Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00.

Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.

3.03 BAR CHARTS A.

Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.

Identify the first work day of each week.

3.04 NETWORK ANALYSIS A.

Prepare network analysis diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using the Critical Path Method.

Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of work; how start of a given activity depends on completion of preceding activities, and how completion of the activity may restrain start of subsequent activities.

Mathematical Analysis: Tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams, using calendar dates, and identify for each activity: 1. Preceding and following event numbers. 2. Activity description. 3. Estimated duration of activity, in maximum 15 day intervals. 4. Earliest start date. 5. Earliest finish date. 6. Actual start date. 7. Actual finish date. 8. Latest start date. 9. Latest finish date. 10. Total and free float; float time shall accrue to Owner and to Owner's benefit. 11. Monetary value of activity, keyed to Schedule of Values. 12. Percentage of activity completed. 13. Responsibility.

2012 / StaceyW

01 32 16 - 1

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

Analysis Program: Capable of compiling monetary value of completed and partially completed activities, accepting revised completion dates, and recomputation of all dates and float.

Required Reports: List activities in sorts or groups: 1. By preceding work item or event number from lowest to highest. 2. By amount of float, then in order of early start.

3.05 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A.

Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.

Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.

After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

3.06 UPDATING SCHEDULE A.

Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.

Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity.

Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.

Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes.

Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.

Submit reports required to support recommended changes.

3.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A.

Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner , and other concerned parties.

Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 32 16 - 2

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

SECTION 01 35 14 LEED CREDIT SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A.

Required: Achievement of this credit is essential for certification of this project.

Preferred: Achievement of this credit would be desirable but is not mandatory.

Not Required: Achievement of this credit is not expected or not possible for this project.

PART 2 CREDIT SUMMARY END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 35 14 - 1

LEED CREDIT SUMMARY

SECTION 01 35 14.01 LEED-NC 2009 CREDIT SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A.

LEED Rating System: LEED-NC 2009 edition.

Required: Achievement of this credit is essential for certification of this project.

Preferred: Achievement of this credit would be desirable but is not mandatory.

Not Required: Achievement of this credit is not expected or not possible for this project.

To Be Provided: Provided via one or more construction contracts.

See Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures, for Contractor's responsibilities.

This section does not include specific work requirements and is included for Contractor's information only.

PART 2 CREDIT SUMMARY 2.01 CERTIFICATION TO BE ACHIEVED: LEED CERTIFIED, REQUIRING MINIMUM OF 40 POINTS. 2.02 SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS): ___ POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A.

SS Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. 1. During Construction: a. Preventive measures and remediation are specified in Section 01 57 13. b. Dust control and basic surface drainage are specified in Section 01 70 00. c. Preventive measures prescribed by state law will be followed. 2. Permanent erosion and sedimentation prevention features are to be provided: a. Grading for sediment traps and retention ponds is specified in Section 31 22 00. b. Riprap is specified in Section 31 37 00. c. Turf (for lawns) is specified in Section 32 92 23 (sodding). d. Plants are specified in Section 32 93 00. e. Turf surfaced gravel roadways, for infrequent vehicular traffic, are specified in Section 32 11 25. f. Open grid concrete pavers are specified in Section 32 14 13.

2.03 WATER EFFICIENCY (WE): ___ POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A.

WE Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Water Use Reduction, 20% Reduction. 1. Appropriate high efficiency and/or waterless fixtures are specified in Section 22 40 00.

2.04 ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE (EA): ___ POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A.

EA Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems. 1. Commissioning performed by and under the supervision of an independent commissioning authority is included in the Contract Documents. 2. General commissioning requirements are specified in Section 01 91 13. 3. The commissioning authority's responsibilities are specified in Section 01 91 14 for Contractor's information only. 4. Commissioning of HVAC is specified in Section 23 08 00. 5. Detailed demonstration and training for commissioning is specified in Section 01 79 00.

EA Prerequisite 2 - Required - No points - Minimum Energy Performance. 1. No modifications to the facility are required. 2. The building envelope, HVAC, lighting, etc., have been designed to meet the criteria.

EA Prerequisite 3 - Required - No points - Fundamental Refrigerant Management. 1. New equipment: No CFC-based refrigerants are used in any equipment. Non-CFC refrigerants are specified in the following sections:

2012 / StaceyW

01 35 14.01 - 1

LEED-NC 2009 CREDIT SUMMARY

Re-Used Equipment: This project includes no re-used equipment that contains refrigerants.

2.05 MATERIALS & RESOURCES: ___ POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A.

MR Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Storage & Collection of Recyclables. 1. The area designated for collection and storage of recyclables is indicated on the drawings as __________. 2. The area designated for collection and storage of landscape trimmings is indicated on the drawings as __________. 3. Waste compactors are specified in Section 11 82 27. 4. Waste chute is specified in Section 14 91 00. 5. Bins, waste cans, can crushers, etc., are considered furnishings and are therefore not part of the construction contract.

2.06 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY: ___ POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A.

EQ Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Minimum IAQ Performance. 1. The building ventilation system has been shown to provide the minimum outdoor ventilation rate prescribed by ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 2. The building ventilation has been designed to meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 3. Anticipated future tenant requirements have been included in ventilation design. 4. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the specifications.

EQ Prerequisite 2 - Required - No points - Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control. 1. Owner intends to prohibit smoking in the building. 2. Exterior smoking areas are located at least 25 feet away from entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. 3. Residential units are designed with air isolation between units and between units and hallways; testing of isolation is specified in Section 01 57 21. 4. Retrofitting of residential units is to be provided, to establish air isolation between units and between units and hallways; testing of isolation is specified in Section 01 57 21. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 35 14.01 - 2

LEED-NC 2009 CREDIT SUMMARY

SECTION 01 35 15 LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT GOALS A.

This project has been designed to achieve the LEED-EB Certified (minimum 32 points) rating as defined in the LEED(r) Green Building Rating System(tm) for Existing Buildings, Upgrades, Operation, and Maintenance, Version 2, July 2005.

Contractor is not responsible for the application for LEED certification, nor for determination of methods of achieving LEED credits unless specifically so indicated.

Many of the LEED credits can be achieved only through intelligent design of the project and are beyond the control of the Contractor. However, certain credits relate to the products and procedures used for construction. Therefore, the full cooperation of the Contractor and subcontractors is essential to achieving final certification.

Contractor shall familiarize himself with the relevant requirements and provide the necessary information and instruction to all subcontractors and installers.

Since Contractor and subcontractors may not be familiar with LEED requirements, this section includes a summary of the products and procedures intended to achieve LEED credits. 1. Some credits are marked PREREQUISITE; these must be achieved regardless of the level of certification; many are dependent on proper performance by Contractor and subcontractors. 2. Other credits involve quantifying percentages by weight and cost; these require careful recordkeeping and reporting by the Contractor. 3. See www.usgbc.org for more information.

Incentive Provisions: Because the LEED rating itself does not have a quantifiable monetary value but achievement of the desired rating is dependent on the performance of Contractor, the Conditions of the Contract include provisions for liquidated damages in the event of failure to achieve the desired rating due to non-compliance by Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 35 15 - 1

LEED CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 35 53 SECURITY PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECURITY PROGRAM A.

Protect Work , existing premises and Owner's operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry.

Initiate program in coordination with Owner's existing security system at project mobilization.

Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy.

1.02 ENTRY CONTROL A.

Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities.

Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification.

Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 35 53 - 1

SECURITY PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 01 42 19 - Reference Standards.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect.

Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

1.03 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - SEE SECTION 01 42 19 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A.

Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

2012 / StaceyW

01 40 00 - 1

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

3.02 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A.

Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 40 00 - 2

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.

Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following:

28 CFR 35 - Department of Justice accessibility regulations relating to State and local governments; current edition.

28 CFR 36 - Department of Justice accessibility regulations relating to public accommodations; current edition.

49 CFR 27, 37, and 38 - Transportation for Individuals with Disabilities; Final Rule; Department of Transportation; current edition.

ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.

FED-STD-795 - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards; 1988.

29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition; as a work place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 41 00 - 1

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding.

Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

PART 2 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATION DOCUMENTS PART 3 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES DOCUMENTS END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 42 19 - 1

REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01 45 33 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A.

Code or Building Code: 2009 Edition of the International Building Code and, more specifically, Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections, of same.

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Agency or individual officially empowered to enforce the building, fire and life safety code requirements of the permitting jurisdiction in which the Project is located.

Special Inspection: 1. Special inspections are inspections and testing of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections mandated by the AHJ that also require special expertise to ensure compliance with the approved contract documents and the referenced standards. 2. Special inspections are separate from and independent of tests and inspections conducted by Owner or Contractor for the purposes of quality assurance and contract administration.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2008.

ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2009.

AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2005.

ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2010.

ASTM E736 - Standard Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).

ASTM E2570 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Water-Resistive Barrier (WRB) Coatings Used under Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) or EIFS with Drainage; 2007.

AWCI 125 - Technical Manual 12-B: Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of Field-Applied Thin Film Intumescent Fire-Resistance Materials; 1998.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.

AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008.

AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2005.

1.03 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, GENERAL A.

Frequency of Special Inspections: Special Inspections are indicated as continuous or periodic. 1. Continuous Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is in progress. 2. Periodic Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency shall be present in the area where work is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at the completion of the work.

3.02 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR STEEL CONSTRUCTION A.

High-Strength Bolt, Nut and Washer Material:

2012 / StaceyW

01 45 33 - 1 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

1. 2.

Verify identification markings conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved contract and to AISC 360, A3.3; periodic. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic.

High-Strength Bolting Installation: Verify items listed below comply with AISC 360, Section M2.5. 1. Snug tight joints; periodic.

Structural Steel and Cold Formed Steel Deck Material: 1. Structural Steel: Verify identification markings conform to AISC 360, Section M3.5; periodic. 2. Other Steel: Verify identification markings conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved contract documents; periodic. 3. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance and test reports; periodic.

Weld Filler Material: 1. Verify identification markings conform to AWS standards specified in the approved contract documents and to AISC 360, A3.5; periodic. 2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic.

Welding: 1. Structural steel and cold formed steel deck: a. Complete and partial joint penetration groove welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; continuous. b. Multipass fillet welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; continuous. c. Single pass fillet welds less than 5/16 inch wide: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; continuous. d. Plug and slot welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; continuous. e. Single pass fillet welds 5/16 inch or greater: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1; periodic. f. Floor and roof deck welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.3; continuous. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Verify items listed below comply with AWS D1.4 and ACI 318, Section 3.5.2. a. Verification of weldability; periodic. b. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames as well as boundary elements of special structural walls of concrete and shear reinforcement; continuous. c. Shear reinforcement; continuous. d. Other reinforcing steel; periodic.

Steel Frame Joint Details: Verify compliance with approved contract documents. 1. Details, bracing and stiffening; periodic. 2. Member locations; periodic. 3. Application of joint details at each connection; periodic.

Cold formed steel trusses spanning 60 feet or more; periodic.

3.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A.

Reinforcing Steel, Including Prestressing of Tendons and Placement: Verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 3.5 and 7.1 through 7.7; periodic.

Reinforcing Steel Welding: Verify compliance with AWS D1.4 and ACI 318, 3.5.2; periodic.

Design Mix: Verify plastic concrete complies with the design mix in approved contract documents and with ACI 318, Chapter 4 and 5.2; periodic.

Specified Curing Temperature and Techniques: Verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 5.11 through 5.13; periodic.

Concrete Strength in Situ: Verify concrete strength complies with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 6.2, for the following.

2012 / StaceyW

01 45 33 - 2 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

Formwork Shape, Location and Dimensions: Verify compliance with approved contract documents and ACI 318, 6.1.1; periodic.

3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR MASONRY CONSTRUCTION A.

Masonry Structures Subject to Special Inspection: 1. Empirically designed masonry, glass unit masonry and masonry veneer in structures designated as "essential facilities". 2. Engineered masonry in structures classified as "low hazard..." and "substantial hazard to human life in the event of failure".

Verify each item below complies with approved contract documents and the applicable articles of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA. 1. Inspections and Approvals: a. Verify compliance with the required inspection provisions of the approved contract documents; periodic. b. Verify approval of submittals required by contract documents; periodic. 2. Compressive Strength of Masonry: Verify compressive strength of masonry units prior to start of construction unless specifically exempted by code; periodic. 3. Slump Flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI): Verify compliance as self consolidating grout arrives on site; continuous. 4. Joints and Accessories: When masonry construction begins, verify: a. Proportions of site prepared mortar; periodic. b. Construction of mortar joints; periodic. c. Location of reinforcement, connectors, prestressing tendons, anchorages, etc.; periodic. 5. Structural Elements, Joints, Anchors, Protection: During masonry construction, verify: a. Size and location of structural elements; periodic. b. Type, size and location of anchors, including anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction; periodic. c. Size, grade and type of reinforcement, anchor bolts and prestressing tendons and anchorages; periodic. d. Welding of reinforcing bars; continuous. 6. Grouting Preparation: Prior to grouting, verify: a. Grout space is clean; periodic. b. Correct placement of reinforcing, connectors, prestressing tendons and anchorages; periodic. c. Correctly proportioned site prepared grouts and prestressing grout for bonded tendons; periodic. d. Correctly constructed mortar joints; periodic. 7. Preparation of Grout Specimens, Mortar Specimens and Prisms: Observe preparation of specimens; periodic.

Engineered Masonry in Buildings Designated as "Essential Facilities": Verify compliance of each item below with approved contract documents and the applicable articles of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402. 1. Inspections and Approvals: a. Verify compliance with the required inspection provisions of the approved contract documents; periodic. b. Verify approval of submittals required by contract documents; periodic. 2. Compressive Strength of Masonry: Verify compressive strength of masonry units prior to start of construction and upon completion of each 5,000 square feet increment of masonry erected during construction; periodic. 3. Preblended Mortar and Grout: Verify proportions of materials upon delivery to site; periodic. 4. Slump Flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI): Verify compliance as self consolidating grout arrives on site; continuous.

2012 / StaceyW

01 45 33 - 3 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

Engineered Elements, Joints, Anchors, Grouting, Protection: Verify compliance of each item below with approved contract documents and referenced standards. a. Proportions of site prepared mortar; periodic. b. Placement of masonry units and construction of mortar joints; periodic. c. Placement of reinforcement, connectors, prestressing tendons, anchorages, etc.; periodic. d. Size and location of structural elements; periodic. e. Type, size and location of anchors, including anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction; continuous. f. Size, grade and type of reinforcement, anchor bolts and prestressing tendons and anchorages; periodic. g. Welding of reinforcing bars; continuous. Preparation of Grout Specimens, Mortar Specimens and Prisms: Observe preparation of specimens; continuous.

3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR PREFABRICATED WOOD CONSTRUCTION A.

High Load Diaphragms: Verify compliance of each item below with approved contract documents. 1. Grade and thickness of sheathing. 2. Nominal size of framing members at adjacent panel edges. 3. Nail or staple diameter and length. 4. Number of fastener lines. 5. Fastener spacing at lines and at edges.

Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses with Clear Span of 60 feet or More: Verify compliance of each item below with approved contract documents in general and with approved truss submittal package in particular. 1. Temporary restraint and bracing. 2. Permanent individual truss member restraint and bracing.

3.06 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SOILS A.

Materials and Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Design bearing capacity of material below shallow foundations; periodic. 2. Design depth of excavations and suitability of material at bottom of excavations; periodic. 3. Materials, densities, lift thicknesses; placement and compaction of backfill: continuous. 4. Subgrade, prior to placement of compacted fill; periodic.

Testing: Classify and test excavated material; periodic.

3.07 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR DRIVEN DEEP FOUNDATIONS A.

Materials, Equipment and Final Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Material types, sizes and lengths; continuous. 2. Capacities of test elements and additional load tests as required; continuous. 3. Placement locations and plumbness; continuous. 4. Type and size of hammer; continuous.

Installation: Observe driving operations and maintain complete and accurate records for each element; continuous. 1. Record number of blows per foot of penetration. 2. Determine penetration required to achieve design capacity. 3. Record tip and butt elevations. 4. Document any damage to foundation element.

3.08 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE DEEP FOUNDATIONS A.

Materials, Equipment and Final Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report.

2012 / StaceyW

01 45 33 - 4 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Element length; continuous. Element diameters and bell diameters; continuous. Embedment into bedrock; continuous. End bearing strata capacity; continuous. Placement locations and plumbness; continuous. Type and size of hammer; continuous.

Drilling Operations: Observe and maintain complete and accurate records for each element; continuous.

Material Volume: Record concrete and grout volumes.

Concrete Elements Associated with Cast-in-Place Deep Foundations: Perform additional inspections as required by the Special Inspections for Concrete Construction article of this section.

3.09 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR HELICAL PILE FOUNDATIONS A.

Materials, Equipment and Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Type and capacity of equipment used; continuous. 2. Pile dimensions; continuous. 3. Tip elevation; continuous. 4. Final depth; continuous. 5. Final installation torque; continuous. 6. Placement locations and plumbness; continuous. 7. Other installation data requested in writing by Architect; continuous.

3.10 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR VERTICAL MASONRY FOUNDATION ELEMENTS A.

Vertical Masonry Foundation Elements are subject to the same special inspection requirements listed in the "Special Inspections for Masonry Construction" Article of this section.

3.11 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS A.

Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials, General: 1. Verify compliance of sprayed-fire resistant materials with specific fire-rated assemblies shown in the approved contract documents. 2. Perform special inspections after rough installation of electrical, mechanical, plumbing, automatic fire sprinkler and suspension systems for ceilings.

Physical and visual tests: Verify compliance with fire-resistance rating. 1. Condition of substrates; periodic. 2. Thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material; periodic. 3. Density of sprayed fire-resistant material in pounds per cubic foot; periodic. 4. Bond strength (adhesion); periodic. 5. Bond strength (cohesion); periodic. 6. Condition of finished application; periodic.

Structural member surface conditions: 1. Inspect structural member surfaces before application of sprayed fire-resistant materials; periodic. 2. Verify preparation of structural member surfaces complies with approved contract documents and manufacturer's written instructions; periodic.

Application: 1. Ensure minimum ambient temperature before and after application complies with the manufacturer's written instructions; periodic. 2. Verify area where sprayed fire-resistant material is applied is ventilated as required by the manufacturer's written instructions during and after application; periodic.

Thickness: Verify that no more than 10 percent of thickness measurements taken from sprayed fire-resistant material are less than thickness required by fire-resistance design in approved

2012 / StaceyW

01 45 33 - 5 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

contract documents. In no case shall the thickness of the sprayed fire-resistant material be less than the minimum below. 1. Minimum Allowable Thickness: Tested according to ASTM E605, periodic. F.

Density: Verify density of sprayed fire-resistant material is no less than density required by the fire-resistance design in the approved contract documents.

Bond Strength: Verify adhesive and cohesive bond strength of sprayed fire-resistant materials is no less than 150 pounds per square foot when in-place samples of the cured material are tested according to ASTM E736 and as described below.

3.12 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTANT COATINGS A.

Verify mastic and intumescent fire resistant coatings comply with AWCI 12-B and the fire-resistance rating shown on the approved contract documents.

3.13 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) A.

Verify water resistive barrier coating applied over sheathing complies with ASTM E2570.

3.14 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SMOKE CONTROL A.

Test smoke control systems as follows: 1. Record device locations and test system for leakage after erection of ductwork but before starting construction that conceals or blocks access to system. 2. Test and record pressure difference, flow measurements, detection function and controls after system is complete and before structure is occupied.

3.15 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE A.

Designated Seismic System Verification: Verify label, anchorage or mounting conforms to certificate of compliance provided by manufacturer or fabricator.

Structural Observations for Seismic Resistance: Visually observe structural system for general conformance with the approved contract documents; periodic.

3.16 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR WIND RESISTANCE A.

Structural Observations for Wind Resistance: Visually observe structural system for general conformance with the approved contract documents; periodic.

3.17 OTHER SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A.

Provide for special inspection of work that, in the opinion of the AHJ, is unusual in nature.

3.18 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A.

Special Inspection Agency shall: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified reference standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and products with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests or inspections specified.

Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 45 33 - 6 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.

Section 01 55 00 - Vehicular Access and Parking.

Section 01 58 13 - Temporary Project Signage.

1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - SEE SECTION 01 51 00 A.

Owner will provide the following: 1. Electrical power and metering, consisting of connection to existing facilities.

Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes.

Existing facilities may not be used.

New permanent facilities may be used.

1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A.

Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization.

Telecommunications services shall include:

Architect will pay for own telecommunications services.

1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.

Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.

Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

1.05 BARRIERS A.

Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.06 FENCING A.

Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.

1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A.

Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING - SEE SECTION 01 55 00 A.

Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.

Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.

Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.

2012 / StaceyW

01 50 00 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1.09 WASTE REMOVAL A.

See Section 01 74 19 - Waste Management, for additional requirements.

Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.

Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.

If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

1.10 PROJECT SIGNS - SEE SECTION 01 58 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 50 00 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A.

Power Service Characteristics: ____ volt, ____ ampere, three phase, four wire.

Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required.

Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location and meter.

Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting.

1.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A.

Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft .

Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 51 00 - 1

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.

Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities.

Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.

Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW CONTROL

01 57 13 - 1

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT

SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A.

Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner.

Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site.

Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.

2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A.

Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:

Motors: Refer to Section 22 05 13, NEMA MG 1 Type. Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections.

2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A.

Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A.

Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.

Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.

A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.

2012 / StaceyW

01 60 00 - 1

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

3. 4. D.

Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.

Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.

3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A.

Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.

Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 60 00 - 2

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 61 16 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS."

All products of each category that are installed in the project must comply; Owner's project goals do not allow for partial compliance.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A.

VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or applied on-site in the building interior: 1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealer coatings. 2. Carpet. 3. Carpet cushion. 4. Carpet tile. 5. Resilient floor coverings. 6. Wood flooring. 7. Paints and coatings. 8. Insulation. 9. Gypsum board. 10. Acoustical ceilings and panels. 11. Student and teacher desks, tables, and chairs. 12. Systems furniture and seating. 13. Wall coverings.

Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.

Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified or not; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.

Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers, whether specified or not; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

CAL (CHPS LEM) - Low-Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS); current edition at www.chps.net/.

CAL (VOC) - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers (including Addendum 2004-01); State of California Department of Health Services; 2004

CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.

GEI (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARD Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org.

SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current listings at www.scscertified.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category. 1. Identify evidence submittals with the words "LEED Report".

Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit product data showing compliance, except when another type of evidence of compliance is required.

Installer Certifications for Accessory Materials: Require each installer of any type of product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1) no

2012 / StaceyW CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

01 61 16 - 1

VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC)

adhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have been used in the installation of his products, or 2) that such products used comply with these requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.

All VOC-Restricted Products: Provide products having VOC content of types and volume not greater than those specified in State of California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current GREENGUARD Children & Schools certification; www.greenguard.org. b. Current Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus certification; www.carpet-rug.org. c. Current SCS Floorscore certification; www.scscertified.com. d. Current SCS Indoor Advantage Gold certification; www.scscertified.com. e. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. f. Current certification by any other agencies acceptable to CHPS. g. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with CHPS requirements for getting a product listed in the Low-Emitting Materials Product List; report must include laboratory's statement that the product meets the specified criteria. 2. Product data submittals showing VOC content are NOT acceptable forms of evidence.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner.

All additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

01 61 16 - 2

VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC)

SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A.

For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A.

New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 70 00 - 1

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

3.02 PREPARATION A.

Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A.

Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.

Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect.

Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and ________. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and ________.

Periodically verify layouts by same means.

Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.

Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.

Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.

Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 70 00 - 2

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING A.

Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A.

Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP A.

Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 70 00 - 3

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.09 ADJUSTING A.

Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.10 FINAL CLEANING A.

Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

Clean filters of operating equipment.

Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.

Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.

Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.

Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.

Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.

Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 70 00 - 4

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A.

Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.

Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible.

LEED Certification for this project is dependent on diversion of 50 percent, by weight, of potential landfill trash/waste by recycling and/or salvage.

The following recycling incentive programs are mandatory for this project; Contractor is responsible for implementation: 1. _______: Revenue or savings shall accrue to Contractor. 2. _______: Rebates and credits must be applied for by Owner and shall accrue to Owner.

Owner has made arrangements for salvage of the following materials by others: 1. _______: Recipient will provide containers and pick up. 2. _______: Contractor shall deliver to recipient's location at ______ weekly.

Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports.

Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A.

Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.

Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations.

Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity.

Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.

Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others.

Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.

2012 / StaceyW AND DISPOSAL

01 74 19 - 1

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.

Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.

Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water.

M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N.

Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.

Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.

Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method.

2012 / StaceyW AND DISPOSAL

01 74 19 - 2

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

Recycling Incentive Programs: 1. Where revenue accrues to Contractor, submit copies of documentation required to qualify for incentive. 2. Where revenue accrues to Owner, submit any additional documentation required by Owner in addition to information provided in periodic Waste Disposal Report.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A.

See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for substitution submission procedures.

For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition to requirements specified in Section 01 60 00: 1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product. 2. Cost savings on waste disposal, compared to specified product, to be deducted from the Contract Sum. 3. Proposed disposal method for waste product. 4. Markets for recycled waste product.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A.

See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation.

See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.

See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling.

See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A.

Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.

Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.

Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.

Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre-construction meeting. 3. Regular job-site meetings.

Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.

Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations.

Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.

2012 / StaceyW AND DISPOSAL

01 74 19 - 3

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.

Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW AND DISPOSAL

01 74 19 - 4

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Operation and Maintenance Data.

Warranties and bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.

For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A.

Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

Co-execute submittals when required.

Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 78 00 - 1

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.

Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred.

Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees. 1. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor.

Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data.

Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session. 4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.

2012 / StaceyW

01 79 00 - 1

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A.

Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner personnel training is specified.

Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.

Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL A.

Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted.

Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.

Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.

Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority.

Provide training in minimum two hour segments.

The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms.

Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

Product- and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.

2012 / StaceyW

01 79 00 - 2

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

7. 8.

Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. J.

Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

01 79 00 - 3

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

SECTION 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.

Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section specifies the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning: 1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents: Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. 3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete: Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) data submittals by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 4. Verify that the Ownerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is utilized to achieve this.

The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority, unless they require review by Architect; in that case, submit to Architect first. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of Prefunctional Checklists or Functional Test requirements; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. 5. As soon as possible after submittals made to Architect are approved, submit copy of approved submittal to the Commissioning Authority.

Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions that are shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered.

Product Data: If submittals to Architect do not include the following, submit copies as soon as possible: 1. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures. 4. Fan and pump curves. 5. Factory test reports. 6. Warranty information, including details of Owner's responsibilities in regard to keeping warranties in force.

Startup Plans and Reports.

Completed Prefunctional Checklists.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 1

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A.

Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of Owner.

Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: 1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to accuracy of 0.5 degree F and resolution of plus/minus 0.1 degree F. 2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter), calibrated within the last year. 3. Calibration: According to the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection.

Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the property of Owner.

Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment. 1. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning Authority and will not become the property of Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN A.

Commissioning Authority has prepared the Commissioning Plan. 1. Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority for purposes of completing the commissioning plan. 2. Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturer representatives.

Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan.

Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination requirements for all parties in the commissioning process.

Commissioning Schedule: 1. Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to Commissioning Authority within 60 days after award of Contract. 2. Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup. 3. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems. 4. Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and Functional Test procedures, to avoid delay.

3.02 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS A.

Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup plan, submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup.

Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), document compliance by submitting the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity.

Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 2

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

3.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A.

A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other assembly specified to be commissioned. 1. No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed. 2. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists, regardless of apparent redundancy. 3. Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms: a. Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed, started up, and operating and ready for Functional Testing. b. Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified, itemized by unit. c. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information "as specified," "as submitted," and "as installed." d. Serial number of installed unit. e. List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup and Functional Testing; these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for equipment and systems may include normal manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s start-up checklist items and minor testing. f. Sensor and actuator calibration information.

Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists, after completion of installation and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority is not required unless otherwise specified. 1. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete without deficiencies. 2. Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable Functional Testing; re-submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of remaining items. 3. Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors, with identification recorded on the form. 4. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form. 5. Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at his option. 6. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Contractor is responsible for correct startup and operation. 7. Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Authority within two days of completion.

Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to Contractor. 1. Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where so indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority to aid in preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup checklists, and O&M data. 3. Commissioning Authority may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of whether they are explicitly mentioned in the Contract Documents or not. 4. When asked to review the proposed Checklists, do so in a timely manner.

Commissioning Authority Witnessing: Required for: 1. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by the commissioning plan. 2. A sampling of non-primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan.

Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to Owner.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 3

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning Authority immediately.

3.04 FUNCTIONAL TESTS A.

A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by the final test procedures.

Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout.

Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests, including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose.

Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re-testing at no extra cost to Owner; if a deficiency is not corrected and re-tested immediately, the Commissioning Authority will document the deficiency and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction. 1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or does not perform properly. 2. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Contractor completes the form certifying that the item is ready to be re-tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Authority; the Commissioning Authority will reschedule the test and the Contractor shall re-test. 3. Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all items. 4. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing. 5. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process, Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and subsequent re-tests.

Functional Test Procedures: 1. Some test procedures are included in the Contract Documents; where Functional Test procedures are not included in the Contract Documents, test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with Contractor. 2. Examples of Functional Testing: a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). b. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. c. Systems are run through all the HVAC control systemâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state. d. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; spot checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority is Functional Testing.

Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of timing.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 4

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

3.05 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION A.

Calibrate all field-installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated.

Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by Owner beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results.

All Sensors: 1. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic operation. 2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. 3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for temperature make sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F of each other, and for pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other. 4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.

Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application: 1. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. 2. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. 3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor.

Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application. 1. Disconnect sensor. 2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. 3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control panel. 4. Using manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature. 5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter. 6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the building automation system. 7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform with specified control ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction. 8. Reconnect sensor. 9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. 10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. 11. If not, replace sensor and repeat. 12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator.

Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums: 1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design. 2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design. 3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F. 4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design. 5. Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg. 6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design. 7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design. 8. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F.

Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet.

Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 5

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. I.

For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system readout. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).

Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils. 1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed. 2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.

3.06 TEST PROCEDURES - GENERAL A.

Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows, pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to their pre-test condition.

Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or near-identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows: 1. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only minor size or capacity difference. 2. Sampling is not allowed for: a. Major equipment. b. Life-safety-critical equipment. c. Prefunctional Checklist execution. 3. XX = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample; defined for specific type of equipment. 4. YY = the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested; defined for specific type of equipment. 5. Randomly test at least XX percent of each group of identical equipment, but not less than three units. This constitutes the "first sample." 6. If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail, test another XX percent of the remaining identical units. 7. If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining identical units. 8. If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing.

Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the â&#x20AC;&#x153;observationâ&#x20AC;?).

Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the response in a VAV box.

Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value.

Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation.

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 6

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect indicators.

Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems; where monitoring of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures: 1. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor; at the Commissioning Authorityâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s request, Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge. 2. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers. 3. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be replaced with datalogger monitoring. 4. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and at least 5 columns of point values on same page. 5. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it. 6. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing.

3.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements.

Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to Owner.

Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.

Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to Owner. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW REQUIREMENTS

01 91 13 - 7

GENERAL COMMISSIONING

SECTION 01 91 14 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.

Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section covers the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities for commissioning: 1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists are utilized to achieve this. 2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents: Functional Tests performed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. 3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete: Detailed O&M data submittals are specified. 4. Verify that the Ownerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is specified.

Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion.

Coordinate and direct all the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.

The Commissioning Authority is to be employed by Owner.

The Commissioning Authority is to be employed by Construction Manager on behalf of Owner.

1.02 SCOPE OF COMMISSIONING A.

The following are to be commissioned:

Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as requiring commissioning.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASHRAE Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process; 1996

PECI (MCP) - Model Commissioning Plan; Portland Energy Conservation, Inc.; located at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm ; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A.

Commissioning Plan: 1. Submit preliminary draft for review by Owner and Architect within 30 days after commencement of Commissioning Authority contract. 2. Submit revised draft to be included in the construction contract documents, not less than 4 weeks prior to bid date. 3. Submit final plan not more than 90 days after commencement of construction, for issuance to all parties.

General Commissioning Specifications. 1. Submit preliminary draft for review by Owner and Architect at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of Commissioning Authority contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit final draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date.

List of Prefunctional Checklists to be developed: 1. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later.

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 1

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

2. 3.

Submit revised list not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. Submit final list not more than 60 days after start of construction.

Prefunctional Checklists: 1. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. 3. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than 4 weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned.

List of Functional Test procedures to be developed: 1. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit revised list not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the Contract Documents; this is intended to be a list of titles, not full description of the tests. 3. Submit final list not more than 60 days after start of construction.

Functional Test Procedures: 1. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. 3. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than 4 weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned.

Training Plan.

Commissioning Record: Submit to Contractor for inclusion with O&M manuals.

Final Commissioning Report: Submit to Owner.

Recommissioning Manual: Submit within 60 days after receipt of Owner's instructions to proceed with preparation.

LEED Reports: Submit Final Commissioning Report and Recommissioning Manual in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01 35 15.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Qualifications:

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM A.

Give each submitted form or report a unique identification; use the following scheme.

Type of Document: Use the following prefixes: 1. Commissioning Plan: CP-. 2. Prefunctional Checklist: PC-. 3. Functional Test Procedure: FTP-. 4. Functional Test Report: FTR-. 5. Commissioning Report: CR-.

System Type: Use the first 4 digits from CSI/CSC MasterFormat, 2004 Edition, that are applicable to the system; for example: 1. 2300: HVAC system as a whole. 2. 2320: HVAC Piping and Pumps. 3. 2330: HVAC Air Distribution.

Component Number: Assign numbers sequentially, using 1, 2, or 3 digits as required to accommodate the number of units in the system.

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 2

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

Test, Revision, or Submittal Number: Number each successive iteration sequentially, starting with 1.

Example: PC-2320-001.2 would be the Prefunctional Checklist for equipment item 1 in the HVAC piping system, probably a pump; this is the second, revised submittal of this checklist.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN A.

Prepare and maintain the Commissioning Plan, covering commissioning schedule, Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test procedures, coordination requirements, and forms to be used, for all parties in the commissioning process. 1. Call and chair meetings of the Commissioning Team when appropriate. 2. Give Contractor sufficient notice for scheduling commissioning activities. 3. Develop a comprehensive start-up and initial systems checkout plan with cooperation of Contractor and subcontractors. 4. The PECI Model Commissioning Plan may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan. 5. ASHRAE Guideline 1 may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan. 6. Avoid replication of information included in the construction contract documents to the greatest extent possible.

Review the construction contract documents for Contractor submittals of draft checklists, draft test procedures, manufacturer startup procedures, and other information intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparing the Commissioning Plan.

Commissioning Schedule: 1. Coordinate with Contractor anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system. 2. Contractor's scheduling responsibilities are specified in the construction contract documents. 3. Revise and re-issue schedule monthly. 4. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems. 5. Deliver relevant Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures to Contractor in time to avoid delay.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.

General Commissioning Specifications: Prepare general commissioning specifications coordinated with and integrated into the Contract Documents prepared by Architect. 1. Include general procedures applicable to all types of items to be commissioned and specific procedures for each type of work. 2. Identify Contractor submittals needed for purposes of commissioning, that are not otherwise required to be submitted.

Prefunctional Checklists: Develop detailed Checklists for each item to be commissioned. 1. List of Checklists to be Developed: Prepare and maintain a detailed list of titles, not full text. 2. The Checklist forms are intended to be part of the Contractor's Contract Documents.

Functional Testing: Develop detailed procedures for each item to be commissioned; submit for review by Owner and Architect. 1. List of Test Procedures to be Developed: Prepare and maintain a detailed list of titles, not full text. 2. The forms the Commissioning Authority will use to report Functional Test results are not intended to be part of Contractor's Contract Documents, but the Functional Test Procedures that must be executed by the Contractor must be made part of the Contract Documents, by modification if necessary.

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 3

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

Develop any other reporting forms Contractor will be required to use; if they are likely to require a substantially different amount of work than the Contractor can reasonably anticipate, they must be included in the construction contract documents.

If any part of the documents described above have not been developed by the bid date, coordinate with Architect the issuance of modifications to the construction contract documents

3.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A.

Prefunctional Checklists - Content: Prepare forms for Contractor's use, in sufficient detail to document that the work has been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup. 1. Prepare separate Checklists for each type of equipment, system, or other assembly, customized to the item. 2. Identify each Checklist by using the contract documents identification number or name, if any; if none, create unique identifiers for each Checklist; do not rely on Contractor to number checklists. 3. Multiple identical or near-identical items may appear on a single Checklist provided there is space to record all required data for each separately; label each set of data uniquely. 4. Include space to record manufacturer name, model number, serial number, capacity and other relevant characteristics, and accessories and other features as applicable; include space to record "as specified", "as submitted", and "as installed" data. 5. Include space to record whether or not the required submittals have been received; list each separate type of submittal. 6. Include line items for each physical inspection to be performed. 7. Include line items for each operational inspection to be performed, such as checking switch operation, fan rotation, valve and damper stroke, and measuring actual electrical loads. 8. Include separate section for sensors and actuators, with space for documenting actual physical location and calibration measurements; provide a separate generic calibration checklist identified wherever referenced. 9. Include spaces to record that related Checklists for related work upon which this work depends have been completed.

Prefunctional Checklists - Format: 1. Provide a cover sheet showing name of equipment item or system, documentation identification number (see Documentation Identification Scheme), names of accessory components involved, and identification of related checklists. 2. Include on cover sheet space for Contractor's use in attesting to completeness; provide spaces for the signatures of the general contractor and each subcontractor or other entity responsible, customized to the project and the type of item. 3. Include on the cover sheet, above the signature block, the following statement: "The work referenced in this Checklist and other work integral to or dependent on this work is complete and ready for functional testing. The checklist items are complete and have been checked off only by parties having direct knowledge of the event." Include two checkboxes: a. "This Checklist is submitted for approval with no exceptions." b. "This Checklist is submitted for approval, subject to the attached list of outstanding items, none of which preclude the performance of safe and reliable functional tests. A statement of completion will be submitted upon completion of the outstanding items." 4. Use a consistent, tabular format for all Checklists, with one line per checklist activity. 5. For each line item, provide space for initials and date, and identification of the subcontractor or other entity responsible.

3.04 FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES A.

Develop test procedures in sufficient detail to show that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents and shows proper operation through all modes of operation where

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 4

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

there is a different system response, including seasonal, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, partand full-load. 1. Obtain assistance and review by installing subcontractors. 2. Itemize each test sequence in step-by-step order, with acceptance criteria for each step and for the test as a whole. 3. Include test setup instructions, description of tools and apparatus, special cautions, and. 4. Avoid procedures that would void or otherwise limit warranties; review with Contractor prior to execution. 5. For HVAC systems, procedures may include energy management control system trending, stand-alone datalogger monitoring or manual functional testing. 6. Obtain explicit approval of Contractor in regard to feasibility and safety prior to execution. B.

Functional Test Report Forms: Prepare forms in advance of testing, using a consistent format; include all test procedure information given to Contractor and: 1. Report Identifier (see Documentation Identification Scheme). 2. Test prerequisites. 3. Formulas to be used in calculations. 4. Yes/No check boxes for each step of test. 5. Space to record results, document deficiencies, and make recommendations. 6. Signature and date block for Commissioning Authority.

Functional Test Prerequisites: Include space to verify all of the following items on each Functional Test Report Form, unless truly inapplicable: 1. All related equipment has been started up and start-up reports and Prefunctional Checklists submitted and approved ready for Functional Testing. a. For hydronic systems, check that: 1) Piping system flushing is complete and required report approved. 2) Water treatment system is complete and operational. 3) Test and balance (TAB) is complete and approved. 2. All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents, including final set points and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed, with space for signature of controls installer. 3. Incomplete items identified by Architect during closeout inspections have been corrected or completed. 4. Safeties and operating ranges have been reviewed. 5. A copy of the specified sequence of operation is attached. 6. A copy of applicable schedules and setpoints is attached. 7. A copy of the specified Functional Test Procedures is attached. 8. The Functional Test Procedures have been reviewed and approved by the applicable installer. 9. Vibration control report approved (if required). 10. False loading equipment, system and procedures ready. 11. Sufficient clearance around equipment for servicing. 12. Original values of pre-test setpoints that need to be changed to accommodate testing have been recorded, with a check box provided to verify return to original values (include control parameters, limits, delays, lockouts, schedules, etc.). 13. Any other items on the Prefunctional Checklist or Start-up Reports that need to be re-verified.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION PHASE A.

Coordinate the commissioning work with Contractor and Construction Manager, ensure that commissioning activities are being incorporated into the master schedule.

Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 5

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

Contractor's meeting minutes for issues relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving discrepancies. C.

Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting: Plan and conduct a meeting early in the construction phase to review commissioning activities and responsibilities with all parties involved. Require attendance by all members of the Commissioning Team.

Conduct periodic meetings as necessary to coordinate, resolve planning issues, and aid in resolution of deficiencies, minimizing the time spent by Contractor and Owner personnel; hold meetings at least monthly.

Submit periodic progress reports to Owner and Contractor.

Review Contractor shop drawing submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs; verify that Owner's responsibilities are clearly defined in warranties.

Review and approve submittals directly related to commissioning.

Deliver Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test procedures to Contractor.

Verify satisfactory completion of Prefunctional Checklists by Contractor by reviewing checklists and by site observation and spot checking; provide formal approval when satisfactory.

Verify startup of all systems by reviewing start-up reports and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory.

Coordinate, witness and approve Functional Tests performed by Contractor. Coordinate retesting until satisfactory performance is achieved.

HVAC Commissioning: 1. Gather and review the control sequences and interlocks and work with Contractor and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to prepare detailed Functional Test procedures. 2. Witness all or part of HVAC piping test and flushing procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. 3. Witness all or part of duct testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. 4. Review TAB Plan prepared by Contractor. 5. Before TAB is executed, witness sufficient Functional Testing of the control system to approve it to be used for TAB. 6. Verify air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing completed reports, and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory. 7. Analyze trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance.

M. Witness and document testing of systems and components over which the Commissioning Authority does not have direct control, such as smoke control systems, tests contracted directly by Owner, and tests by manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s personnel; include documentation in O&M manuals. N.

When Functional Testing for specific systems or equipment is specified to be performed by the Commissioning Authority rather than the Contractor, perform such testing without assistance of Contractor.

Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide written progress and test reports with recommended actions.

O&M Data: Review submitted operation and maintenance data for completeness; provide formal approval if satisfactory.

Notify Contractor and Owner of deficiencies in procedures or results; suggest solutions.

3.06 TRAINING A.

Training Plan: Prepare a comprehensive Training Plan, incorporating draft training plans submitted by Contractor.

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 6

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

1. 2. 3. B.

Include a ____ hour session by the HVAC design engineer covering the overall HVAC system and equipment design concepts, with one-line schematic drawings. Include a ____ hour session by the Commissioning Authority on the use of the blank Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test report forms for re-commissioning purposes. Establish criteria for determining satisfactory completion of training.

Verify that training was satisfactorily completed; provide formal approval if satisfactory.

3.07 CLOSEOUT A.

Commissioning Record: Use the same format and organization as specified for the O&M manuals. 1. Include the Final Commissioning Plan and Final Report. 2. For each product or system and equipment item, include the following organized as indicated, with separator tabs: a. Design intent documentation, furnished by Architect or others. b. Detailed operational sequences. c. Startup plan and approved startup reports. d. Filled out Prefunctional Checklists. e. Filled out Functional Test reports; trend logs and monitoring reports and analysis; other verification documentation. f. Training plan and training records. g. Recommissioning recommendations, including time schedule and procedures; include blank copies of all Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test report forms.

Final Commissioning Report: Include: 1. Executive summary. 2. List of participants and roles. 3. Brief facility description. 4. Overview of commissioning scope and general description of testing and verification methods. 5. For each item commissioned, an evaluation of adequacy of: a. The product itself; i.e. compliance with the contract documents. b. Installation. c. Functional performance; include a brief description of the verification method used and observations and conclusions from the testing. d. O&M documentation, including design intent. e. Operator training. 6. List of all outstanding non-compliance items, referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc., where the deficiency is documented. 7. List of unresolved issues, seasonal or deferred testing, and other concerns that could affect facility operation. 8. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, commissioning process changes, etc. (about four to six pages). 9. Attach appendices containing all commissioning documentation, including logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, etc., except that specified to be part of the Commissioning Record.

Recommissioning Manual: Revise the Commissioning Plan documents, checklists, and Functional Test forms as necessary based on accepted recommendations of the final Commissioning Report. Provide step-by-step instructions for recommissioning, blank forms, and cross-references to O&M data needed during recommissioning.

3.08 POST-OCCUPANCY PHASE A.

Coordinate deferred and seasonal Functional Tests; verify correction of deficiencies.

On-Site Review: 10 months after Substantial Completion conduct on-site review with Owner's staff.

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 7

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Review the current facility operation and condition of outstanding issues related to the original and seasonal commissioning. Interview staff to identify problems or concerns they have operating the facility as originally intended. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording these changes in the O&M manuals. Identify areas of concern that are still under warranty or are the responsibility of the original construction contractor. Assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW RESPONSIBILITIES

01 91 14 - 8

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

SECTION 03 01 00 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007.

ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.

ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009.

ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b.

ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.

ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011.

ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.

ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars; 2008.

ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.

ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear; 2005e1.

ASTM C928/C928M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening Cementitious Material for Concrete Repairs; 2009.

ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008).

M. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010. N.

ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 2010.

ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 2010.

AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2005.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Designer Qualifications: Design reinforcement splices under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

Cleaner Qualifications: Company specializing in, and with minimum of 3 years of experience in, the type of cleaning specified.

Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with minimum of 3 years of experience.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Comply with manufacturers' instructions for storage, shelf life limitations, and handling of products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A.

Detergent: Non-ionic detergent.

Alkaline Cleaning Agent: __________.

2012 / StaceyW

03 01 00 - 1

MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE

Acidic Cleaning Agent: __________.

Blasting Medium: ________.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.

3.02 CLEANING EXISTING CONCRETE A.

Provide enclosures, barricades, and other temporary construction as required to protect adjacent work from damage.

Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination using the gentlest method that is effective. 1. Try the gentlest method first, then, if not clean enough, use a less gentle method taking care to watch for impending damage. 2. Clean out cracks and voids using same methods.

The following are acceptable cleaning methods, in order from gentlest to less gentle: 1. Water washing using low-pressure, maximum of 100 psi, and, if necessary, brushes with natural or synthetic bristles. 2. Increasing the water washing pressure to maximum of 400 psi. 3. Adding detergent to washing water; with final water rinse to remove residual detergent. 4. Steam-generated low-pressure hot-water washing. 5. Alkaline cleaning agent applied for the least amount of time that is effective, followed by slight acid rinse and water rinse. 6. Acidic cleaning agent applied for the least amount of time that is effective, followed by water rinse. Test acidic cleaning agents on mock-up surfaces prior to use. 7. Abrasive blasting: Use only abrasive media that have been proven not to damage concrete by testing on mock-up.

Do not use any of the following cleaning methods, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Brushes with wire bristles, grinding with abrasives, solvents, hydrochloric or muriatic acid, sodium hydroxide, caustic soda, or lye. 2. Soap or detergent that is not non-ionic.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will perform field inspection and testing. 1. Test concrete for calcium chloride content during the execution of the Work. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

03 01 00 - 2

MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE

SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2010.

ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2008.

ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL A.

Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place concrete work.

Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.

Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.

Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

Comply with Highways standards of the State of ________.

Use the following form types: 1. Basement Walls Not Exposed To View: Site fabricated plywood. 2. Basement Walls Exposed To View: Site fabricated rough sawn lumber. 3. Supported Floor Slabs: Prefabricated glass fiber pan forms, treated for exposed to view finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION - FORMWORK A.

Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.

Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.

3.02 FORM REMOVAL A.

Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

03 10 00 - 1 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 03 11 19 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Conventional concrete forms designed to be removed after concrete is poured and related accessories.

Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel to be placed at the same time as formwork specified in this section.

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete to be placed into formwork specified in this section..

Section 04 20 01 - Masonry Veneer.

Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete.

Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors, plates and joist seats in cast-in-place concrete.

Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Metal studs supporting insulating concrete forms for floors and roofs.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2010.

ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2008.

ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004.

ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2010.

ASTM C203 - Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation; 2005 (Revision A).

ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2010a.

ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2010.

ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010.

ASTM D1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2010.

ASTM D1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2008.

ASTM D1761 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 2006.

ASTM D2126 - Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging; 2009.

M. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006. N.

ASTM D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics; 2010.

ASTM D2863 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index); 2010.

ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b.

ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.

2012 / StaceyW

03 11 19 - 1

INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

AMVIC Building System; Amvic ICF; www.amvicsystem.com.

Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FORMWORK - GENERAL A.

Provide insulating concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish insulated cast-in-place concrete work.

Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.

Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication and erection of formwork.

Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

2.03 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS A.

Performance Requirements: 1. Thermal Insulance (R-value) of Assembled System: Calculated thermal insulance when tested in accordance with ASTM C177. a. Wall System: 22 deg F hr sq ft, minimum. b. Floor or Roof System: 20 deg F hr sq ft, minimum. 2. Sound Transmission Class, Assembled Wall Units: 49, minimum; based on assembly composed of two rigid foam boards separated by an 8 inch concrete core with a stucco exterior and 5/8 inch thick drywall interior.

Insulating Concrete Form Units for Walls: Rigid, expanded polystyrene boards; boards connected horizontally with injection--molded polypropylene webs and vertically by means of interlocking edges. 1. Board Thickness: 2-1/2 inches . 2. Web Spacing: 6 inches on center, horizontally. 3. Web Configuration: 1/2 inch wide by 15 inches; integral supports for horizontal reinforcing steel; continuous end plates recessed 1/2 inch below surface of insulation on each face of unit to allow attachment of interior and exterior finishes without damage to insulation board. 4. Concrete Core Thickness: 4 inches (101.6 mm), 6 inches (152.4 mm), 8 inches (203.2 mm), 10 inches (254 mm), and 12 inches. 5. Unit Types: a. Reversible straight form. b. Reversible 90 degree corner. c. Reversible 45 degree corner. d. Brick ledge. e. Tapered top. f. End cap. g. " T " units. h. Height-adjustable. i. Radius.

Insulating Concrete Form Units for Floors and Roofs: Rigid, expanded polystyrene shapes; internally reinforced with injection-molded polypropylene webs and with interlocking ends and edges. 1. Size: 12 inches deep by 24 inches long; 32 inches wide with 27-1/.2 inch wide top surface. 2. Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center.

2.04 COMPONENTS A.

Expanded Polystyrene Insulation, General: Comply with the minimum requirements of ASTM C578, Type II and the specified characteristics below.

2012 / StaceyW

03 11 19 - 2

INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Density: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot when tested in accordance with ASTM D1622. Compressive Strength: 19.8 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621. Flexural Strength: 42.6 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance with ASTM C203. Water Absorption: 2.95 percent by volume when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842. Dimensional Stability: 0.52 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2126. Limiting Oxygen Index: 37 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2863. Flammability; when tested according to ASTM E84: a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.

Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Boards: Comply with the minimum requirements of ASTM C578, Type II and the specified characteristics below. 1. Thermal Insulance (R-value): 4 deg F hr sq ft when tested in accordance with ASTM C177. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 2.3 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. 3. Tolerances: a. Edge and Face Trueness: 0.0197 inches per linear foot. b. Length and Width Squareness: 0.0295 inches per linear foot.

Injection Molded Polypropylene Ties and Profiles: 1. Tensile Strength: 253.3 pounds when tested in accordance with ASTM D638. 2. Ignition Temperature: 400 degrees F. 3. Burn Rate: 0.80 inch per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D635. 4. Smoke Density: 25.9 percent maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM D2843. 5. Fastener Resistance; ASTM D1761: a. Type S Fine Thread Drywall Screw Withdrawal Load: 39.61 pounds. b. Type S Fine Thread Drywall Screw Lateral Resistance Load: 60.22 pounds. c. Type W Coarse Thread Drywall Screw Withdrawal Load: 38.42 pounds. d. Type W Coarse Thread Drywall Screw Lateral Resistance Load: 50.56 pounds.

Accessories: Provide the manufacturer's standard items listed below. 1. Internal bracing and alignment. 2. Door and window block outs. 3. Sleeves for wall penetrations.

2.05 MATERIALS A.

Concrete, for Use with insulating Concrete Forms: Comply with the applicable requirements of Section 03 30 00 and specific requirements listed below. 1. Aggregate: a. Normal weight. b. Size: 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch diameter. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 pounds per square inch, minimum. 3. Water to Cement Ratio: 0.55 or less. 4. Slump: 5 inches to 6 inches.

Reinforcing Steel: Comply with the applicable requirements of Section 03 10 00. Size, material grade, placement and spacing as shown on the structural drawings.

Cold Formed Metal Framing: Comply with the applicable requirements of Section 05 40 00. Size, material grade, placement and spacing as shown on the structural drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with insulating concrete form work. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.

2012 / StaceyW

03 11 19 - 3

INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS

Verify placement of dowels and other anchors in foundations comply with the approved contract documents and the recommendations of the insulating concrete form manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A.

Erect formwork, shoring and bracing as recommended by the manufacturer. Protect forms from damage.

Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301.

Brace forms as recommended by manufacturer to ensure stability. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.

Align joints. Install units in running bond.

Ensure webs and attachment strips are properly aligned.

Install steel reinforcement as insulating concrete form work progresses and as shown on the structural engineering drawings.

Install alignment system as recommended by manufacturer and as work progresses.

3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A.

Remove insulating concrete form material and provide provide sleeves or other means to create formed openings where required. Cut forms for utility penetrations as needed. Coordinate location of openings for items to be embedded in or pass through concrete work.

Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.

Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00.

Inspect insulating concrete form system, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work complies with the approved shop drawings and to verify that supports, fastenings, webs, alignment devices, attachment strips and other items are secure.

3.06 CLEANING A.

Clean forms as installation progresses. Remove dirt, dust, debris, excess material, etc. within forms.

Clean formed cavities and openings.

Flush completed forms with compressed air or water. 1. If water is used, ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports and that formwork is free of standing water and dry before concreting begins. 2. During weather cold enough that water could be reasonably expected to freeze, do not use water to clean out forms unless form installation and concreting proceed within a heated enclosure.

Remove snow and ice from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or solutions. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

03 11 19 - 4

INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS

SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT 2.02 FABRICATION PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

03 20 00 - 1

CONCRETE REINFORCING

SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Concrete formwork.

Concrete building frame members.

Concrete for composite floor construction.

Elevated concrete slabs.

Floors and slabs on grade.

Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls.

Concrete foundations and anchor bolts for pre-engineered building.

Concrete foundations for water storage tank(s).

Concrete reinforcement.

Joint devices associated with concrete work.

Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes.

Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 03 35 11 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing.

Section 03 35 23 - Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finishing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.

ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (Errata 2007).

ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000.

ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A.

Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS 2.04 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A.

Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.

Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.

2012 / StaceyW

03 30 00 - 1

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION A.

Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.

Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1. Granular Fill Over Vapor Retarder: Cover vapor retarder with compactible granular fill as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand.

3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A.

Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A.

Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.

Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.

Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

3.05 SLAB JOINTING A.

Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.

Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.

Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.

Load Transfer Construction and Contraction Joints: Install load transfer devices as indicated; saw cut joint at surface as indicated for contraction joints.

Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.

Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section for joint sealant.

3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A.

An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect finished slabs for conformance to specified tolerances.

Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.

Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.

2012 / StaceyW

03 30 00 - 2

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A.

Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.

Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

03 30 00 - 3

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 04 05 11 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Mortar for masonry.

Grout for masonry.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 04 01 00 - Maintenance of Masonry: Bedding and pointing mortar for masonry restoration work.

Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.

Section 04 20 01 - Masonry Veneer: Installation of mortar.

Section 04 20 02 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.

Section 04 42 00 - Exterior Stone Cladding: Installation of mortar.

Section 04 43 01 - Stone Masonry Veneer: Installation of mortar.

Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Products and execution for grouting steel door frames installed in masonry.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM C5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes; 2010.

ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005.

ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2011.

ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004.

ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.

ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006.

ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010.

ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete; 2011.

ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.

ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.

ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS A.

At Contractor's option, mortar and grout may be field-mixed from packaged dry materials, made from factory premixed dry materials with addition of water only, or ready-mixed.

Mortar Color: Natural gray unless otherwise indicated.

Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification. 1. Exterior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N. 2. Exterior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type N. 3. Interior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N. 4. Interior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type O.

Grout Mix Designs: 1. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2012 / StaceyW

04 05 11 - 1

MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING

2.02 MATERIALS A.

Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime, and sand; complying with ASTM C387/C387M and capable of producing mortar of the specified strength in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only. 1. Type: Type N. 2. Color: Standard gray. 3. Products: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Repointing: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime, and graded sand; capable of producing Type O mortar in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only. 1. Products: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Packaged Dry Material for Grout for Masonry: Premixed cementitious materials and dried aggregates; capable of producing grout of the specified strength in accordance with ASTM C476 with the addition of water only. 1. Type: Fine. 2. Products: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 1. Type: Type I - Normal. 2. Color: Standard gray.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C91. 1. Type: Type N. 2. Colored Mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample. 3. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type.

Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.

Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979. 1. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.

Water: Clean and potable.

2.03 MORTAR MIXING A.

Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.

Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.

Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio; mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, uniform in coloration.

Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

2.04 GROUT MIXING A.

Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.

Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout.

2012 / StaceyW

04 05 11 - 2

MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.

3.02 GROUTING A.

Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of contract documents.

Low-Lift Grouting: 1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours.

High-Lift Grouting: 1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours. 2. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

04 05 11 - 3

MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING

SECTION 04 20 01 MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting.

Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Through-wall masonry flashings.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007.

ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A.

Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 11.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A.

Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, grade 40 (280) yield grade, deformed billet bars; galvanized.

Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.04 FLASHINGS A.

Metal Flashing Materials: Copper, as specified in Section 07 62 00.

Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 40 mil thick. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; X-Seal Transition Membrane: www.h-b.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 1 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper. . 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Plastic/Kraft Paper Flashings: 3 mil thick sheet polyethylene bonded to layer of fiber reinforced asphalt and backed with Kraft paper. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Copper/Polyethylene Flashing: Polyethylene film laminated to a 2 oz/sq ft copper sheet through a fiberglass scrim. 1. Manufacturer: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Polymer Coated Copper Flashing: Polymer coating bonded to a 2 oz/sq ft copper sheet through a fiberglass scrim. 1. Manufacturer:

2012 / StaceyW

04 20 01 - 1

MASONRY VENEER

Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Copper/Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: 3 oz/sq ft copper sheet coated with elastic asphalt compound. 1. Manufacturer: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Flexible Flashing with Elvaloy KEE: Solid-phase flexibilizer added to membrane flashing. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637, Type I, 0.040 inch thick. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet; 0.025 inch total thickness; with cross-linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Prefabricated Metal Flashing: Smooth fabricated 12 oz/sq ft copper flashing for surface mounted conditions. 1. Manufacturers: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 COURSING A.

Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.03 PLACING AND BONDING A.

Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER 3.05 MASONRY FLASHINGS A.

Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.

Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.

2012 / StaceyW

04 20 01 - 2

MASONRY VENEER

Extend plastic, EPDM, and ______ flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

04 20 01 - 3

MASONRY VENEER

SECTION 04 43 01 STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Setting and pointing mortar.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2009.

ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.

ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009.

ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 2008.

ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.

ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010.

ASTM C503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone; 2010.

ASTM C568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2010.

ASTM C615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone; 2011.

ILI (HB) - Indiana Limestone Handbook; Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; 2007, 22nd Edition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Stone Quarriers: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Stone Masonry Reinforcement and Accessories 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 STONE 2.03 MORTAR 2.04 ACCESSORIES 2.05 STONE FABRICATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions.

Arrange stone coursing in running bond with consistent joint width.

Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width.

3.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

04 43 01 - 1

STONE MASONRY VENEER

SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Structural steel framing members, support members and suspension cables.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing.

Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.

AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.

Suspension Cable: ________ wire rope.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A.

Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

05 12 00 - 1

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Open web steel joists , with bridging, attached seats and anchors.

Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.

SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2005.

SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004).

SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Steel Joists: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS A.

Open Web Joists: SJI Type K Joists: 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. End bearing of 2-1/2 inches on steel supports. 3. End bearing of 4 inches on masonry supports. 4. Finish: Shop primed.

Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 FINISH A.

Shop prime joists as specified.

Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A.

Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.

Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment.

Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of the work of this section.

After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.

Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.

2012 / StaceyW

05 21 00 - 1

STEEL JOIST FRAMING

Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

05 21 00 - 2

STEEL JOIST FRAMING

SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Acoustical roof deck.

Roof deck.

Composite floor deck.

Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches.

Stud shear connectors.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2007.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DECK A.

All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. 1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection of Diaphragms: 1/500 of the height of the wall.

Acoustical Roof Deck: Non-composite type, steel sheet with plain vertical flute faces perforated with 1/8 inch diameter holes staggered 3/8 inch on center:

Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:

Composite Floor Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

05 31 00 - 1

STEEL DECKING

SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)

ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.

ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2010.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.

SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM A.

Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible.

Deliver to site in largest practical sections.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A.

Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels. 2. Painted finish.

Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating. 1. Base Metal: Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33/230. 2. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels.

Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness. 2. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch. b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch.

2012 / StaceyW

05 40 00 - 1

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

c. 3.

Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

2.03 WALL SHEATHING 2.04 ACCESSORIES A.

Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

Water-Resistive Barrier: 60 minute water-resistive Kraft building paper.

2.05 FASTENERS A.

Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M.

Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.

Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A.

Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A.

Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.

3.03 WALL SHEATHING A.

Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws. 1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 96 inches, measured horizontally. 2. Provide steel diagonal bracing at corners. 3. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

05 40 00 - 2

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Shop fabricated steel, aluminum, and ________ items.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.

ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A.

Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

05 50 00 - 1

METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Wall mounted handrails.

Stair railings and guardrails.

Free-standing railings at steps.

Balcony railings and guardrails.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2010.

ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).

1.03 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Handrails and Railings: 1. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc; _______: www.crlaurence.com. 2. Kee Safety, Inc; Kee Klamp (steel): www.keesafety.com. 3. KaneSterling; Product ____: www.sterlingdula.com. 4. The Wagner Companies; Product ____: www.wagnercompanies.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Non-Weld Pipe Fittings:

2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.

Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.

Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.

Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.

Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.

Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.

2.03 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.

Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.

2.04 FABRICATION A.

Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.

2012 / StaceyW

05 52 13 - 1

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.

Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints.

Anchor railings securely to structure.

3.04 TOLERANCES A.

Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.

Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

05 52 13 - 2

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Finish carpentry items.

Wood casings and moldings.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org.

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.

Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of completed work. 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS Grade or Grades specified. 2. This project has been registered as AWI/QCP project number __________. 3. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels. 4. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program. 5. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and products meet the specified requirements. 6. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification. 7. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A.

Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A.

Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00.

Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc.

2.03 FABRICATION A.

Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.

When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

2012 / StaceyW

06 20 00 - 1

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated.

Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

3.02 TOLERANCES A.

Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.

Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

06 20 00 - 2

FINISH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Specially fabricated cabinet units.

Countertops.

Cabinet hardware.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A.

Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A.

Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00.

Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

2.03 COUNTERTOPS 2.04 HARDWARE 2.05 FABRICATION PART 3 EXECUTION END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

06 41 00 - 1

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Bituminous dampproofing.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2011.

ASTM D449 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2008).

ASTM D1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal; 1997 (Reapproved 2002).

ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007).

ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007.

NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPPROOFING PRODUCTS A.

Bituminous Dampproofing: Cold-applied water-based emulsion; asphalt with mineral colloid or chemical emulsifying agent; with or without fiber reinforcement; asbestos-free; suitable for application on vertical and horizontal surfaces. 1. Composition - Vertical Application: ASTM D1227 Type III or ASTM D1187 Type I. 2. Composition - Horizontal and Low-Slope Application: ASTM D1227 Type II or III. 3. VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal regulations. 4. Applied Thickness: 1/16 inch, minimum, wet film. 5. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Sealmastic Emulsion Type I (spray-grade): www.wrmeadows.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer.

2.02 HOT ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A.

Bitumen: ASTM D449, Type I, asphalt.

Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate.

Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D4586, Type I.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.

Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.

Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.

Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate.

3.02 APPLICATION A.

Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of asphalt dampproofing.

2012 / StaceyW

07 11 13 - 1

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

__________: Patch disturbed areas of existing asphalt dampproofing with two coats of new dampproofing of the same generic type.

Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Apply bitumen with mop.

Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

07 11 13 - 2

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, and exterior wall behind ________ wall finish.

Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.

Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.

ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b.

ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2011.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A.

Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Contractor's option.

Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 2. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.

Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Where indicated, provide foil facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Thermal Resistance: R of ____. 4. Thickness: __ inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A.

Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.

Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A.

Install boards horizontally on walls.

Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A.

Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.

Install boards horizontally on walls.

Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

2012 / StaceyW

07 21 00 - 1

THERMAL INSULATION

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A.

Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.

Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab.

3.05 BATT INSTALLATION A.

Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.

Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

07 21 00 - 2

THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 21 19 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

07 21 19 - 1

FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not air tight or vapor retardant.

Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and ____ water vapor-resistant and air tight.

Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and ____.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.

Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt insulation.

Section 07 24 00 - Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Water-resistive barrier under exterior insulation.

Section 07 51 00 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing system.

Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing system.

Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing system.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A.

Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders.

Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders.

Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm.

Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

AATCC Test Method 30 - Antifungal Activity, Assessment on Textile Materials: Mildew and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials; 2004.

ASTM C836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course; 2011.

ASTM D779 - Standard Test Method for Water Resistance of Paper, Paperboard, and Other Sheet Materials by the Dry Indicator Method; 2003.

ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.

ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2003.

ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2009.

2012 / StaceyW

07 25 00 - 1

WEATHER BARRIERS

1.05 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.

Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions.

Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A.

Water-Resistive Barrier: Provide on exterior walls under exterior cladding. 1. Use building paper unless otherwise indicated.

Air Barrier: 1. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier coating.

Interior Vapor Retarder:

Exterior Vapor Retarder: 1. On outside surface of inside wythe of masonry cavity wall use vapor retarder coating.

2.02 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER MATERIALS (NEITHER AIR BARRIER NOR VAPOR RETARDER) A.

Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated Kraft building paper complying with requirements of ICC-ES AC38 Grade D. 1. Water Resistance: 60 minutes, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D779.

2.03 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE) A.

Air Barrier Coating: Cold-fluid-applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing membrane. 1. Material: Water-based acrylic or polymer-modified bitumen, with VOC content of zero. 2. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) without requiring a primer. 3. Adhesion to Paper and Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Sufficient to ensure failure due to delamination of sheathing. 4. Dry Film Thickness: 10 mils (0.010 inch), minimum. 5. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. 6. Water Vapor Permeance: 12 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.

2.04 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER-RESISTIVE) A.

Vapor Retarder Coating: Cold liquid applied, resilient, UV-resistant coating and associated joint treatment complying with requirements of ASTM C836 except for minimum mil thickness. 1. Dry Film Thickness: 5 mils (0.005 inch), minimum. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.2 perm, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. VOC Content: Less than 50 g per L when tested in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Resistance to Fungal Growth: Pass AATCC Test Method 30. 5. Suitable for use on concrete, masonry, plywood and gypsum sheathing. 6. Joint Preparation Treatment: Coating manufacturer's recommended method, either tape or reinforcing mesh saturated with coating material. 7. Products: a. BASF Corporation; Product: ENERSHIELD-I; www.enershield.basf.com.

2012 / StaceyW

07 25 00 - 2

WEATHER BARRIERS

b. 8.

Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; Product: Barriseal-R; www.carlisle-ccw.com. c. Epro Services, Inc.; ECOFLEX-S: www.eproserv.com. Joint Filler: As recommended by coating manufacturer and suitable to the substrate.

2.05 SEALANTS A.

Butyl Sealant: Type ____ as specified in Section 07 90 05.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION A.

Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION A.

Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Water-Resistive Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed water but with seams not sealed.

Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.

Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.

Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings. 5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 6. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.

Coatings: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints.

Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface.

2012 / StaceyW

07 25 00 - 3

WEATHER BARRIERS

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.

3.05 PROTECTION A.

Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

Do not leave paper- or felt-based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

07 25 00 - 4

WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Manufactured roof specialties, including copings, fascias, gravel stops, vents, and snow guards.

Roof control and expansion joint covers.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems; Single Ply Roofing Industry; 2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A.

Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners. 1. Configuration: Fascia, cant, and edge securement for roof membrane; 2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code. 3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick, minimum.

Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners. 1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners. 2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code. 3. Material: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, 24 gage, 0.024 inch thick, minimum.

Control and Expansion Joint Covers: Composite construction of ____ inch wide flexible EPDM flashing of white color with closed cell urethane foam backing, each edge seamed to aluminum sheet metal flanges, designed for nominal joint width of 1 inch. Include special formed corners, tees, intersections, and wall flashings, each sealed watertight.

Attic Vents: Dome type; aluminum, ____ inch thick, color coated , formed to permit installation with shingle roofing and shed water. Fabricate with ____ sq in per linear foot minimum free area of ventilation. 1. Finish: Mill finish. 2. Color: As shown on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly.

3.02 INSTALLATION A.

Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

07 71 00 - 1

ROOF SPECIALTIES

SECTION 07 71 23 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts.

Precast concrete splash pads.

Sheet metal splash pans.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting of metal surfaces.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Gutters and Downspouts: 1. ATAS International, Inc; Product ____: www.atas.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS A.

Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal.

2.03 COMPONENTS A.

Gutters: CDA rectangular style profile.

Downspouts: CDA Rectangular profile.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Slope gutters ____ inch per foot , ___ percent minimum. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW DOWNSPOUTS

07 71 23 - 1

MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND

SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.

Steel frames for wood doors.

Fire-rated steel doors and frames.

Thermally insulated steel doors.

Sound-rated steel doors and frames.

Bullet resistant steel doors and frames.

Steel glazing frames.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.

ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).

ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.

ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2005.

ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.

ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.

ASTM E1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).

BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.

NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.

NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.

UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

M. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N.

UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.

Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.

2012 / StaceyW

08 11 13 - 1

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors; Product ____: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft; Product ____: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A.

Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 STEEL DOORS A.

Exterior Doors Type ___: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.

Interior Doors , Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

Interior Doors , Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive pressure"). a. Rate of Temperature Rise Across Door Thickness for _____ Doors: 250 F degrees. b. Provide units listed and labeled by UL. c. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

2012 / StaceyW

08 11 13 - 2

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Interior Doors , Sound-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E90 or ASTM E1408. 3. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame. 4. Force to Open and Close and Latch: Not more than 5 pounds.

Exterior and Interior Bullet Resistant Doors: 1. Ballistic Resistance: UL 752, Level 1. 2. Core Material: Polystyrene. 3. Hinge Rail and Reinforcement: Non - beveled edge, reinforced with a continuous 10 ga, 0.134 inch steel channel projection welded at 5 inches on center maximum, and compatible with 4.5 inch full mortise template hinges.

2.04 STEEL FRAMES A.

General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage b. Frames for Sound-Rated Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 16 gage 2. Finish: Same as for door.

Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.

Interior Door Frames , Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.

Interior Door Frames , Fire-Rated: Knock-down type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.

Sound-Rated Door Frames: Knock-down type.

Interior and Exterior Bullet Resistant Frames: UL 752, same level of ballistic resistance as door; face welded construction, ground smooth, fully prepared and reinforced for hardware installation.

Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.

Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 , factory installed.

Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners ; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A.

Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 , door manufacturer's standard.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify existing conditions before starting work.

Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

2012 / StaceyW

08 11 13 - 3

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

3.02 INSTALLATION A.

Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.

In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.

Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

Coordinate installation of hardware.

Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 TOLERANCES A.

Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.04 ADJUSTING A.

Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.

Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch in accordance with ASTM E1408; adjust as required to comply. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

08 11 13 - 4

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.

ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.

ASTM E1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).

AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.

ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2009.

ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.

NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2008.

UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

Specimen warranty.

Test Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements for the following: 1. Sound-retardant doors and frames; sealed panel tests are not acceptable. 2. Electrostatic shielded doors and frames. 3. Bullet resistant doors and frames.

Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, ____ by ____ inch in size cut from top corner of door.

Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, ____ by ____ inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.

Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.

Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

2012 / StaceyW

08 14 16 - 1

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.05 WARRANTY A.

See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.

Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.

Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Eggers Industries; Product ____: www.eggersindustries.com. 2. Haley Brothers; Product ____: www.haleybros.com. 3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc; Product ____: www.marshfielddoors.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND PANELS A.

All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.

Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations . 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when door is open. 3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures; with "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edge sealing. 4. Sound Retardant Doors: Minimum STC of ____, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E1408. 5. Lead Lined Doors: Minimum 1/16 inch thick, 4 pound lead unless otherwise indicated. 6. Electrostatic Shielded Doors: ______. 7. Bullet Resistant Doors: UL 752 Level 1. 8. Hardboard facing with factory opaque finish where indicated on drawings.

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A.

Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above.

Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.

Sound Retardant Doors: Equivalent to Type PC construction with core as required to achieve rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.

Lead Lined Doors: Equivalent to Type bonded particleboard core (PC) with continuous lead sheet from edge to edge in the center of the core or between the crossband and the core; lead thickness, plies, and faces as indicated above.

Electrostatic Shielded Doors: Equivalent to Type bonded particle board core (PC), with continuous shielding from edge to edge in the center of the core or between the crossband and the core; shielding performance, plies and faces as indicated above.

2012 / StaceyW

08 14 16 - 2

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Bullet Resistant Doors: Equivalent to Type bonded particleboard core (PC); rating, plies, and faces as indicated above.

2.04 DOOR FACINGS A.

Hardboard Facing for Opaque Finish: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two sides) hardboard, composition face, 1/8 inch thick.

2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A.

Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.

Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

08 14 16 - 3

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and infill panels.

Factory glazing.

Operating hardware.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2008.

AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998.

AAMA 612 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and Transparent Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum; 2002.

AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009.

AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002.

AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004.

ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.

ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004.

ASTM E1332 - Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation; 2010.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of commercial aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than three years of experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.

Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WINDOWS A.

Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally broken, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Frame Depth: _______________.

2012 / StaceyW

08 51 13 - 1

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

Deflection: Maximum allowable deflection for any member supporting a single lite of glass: 3/4 inch. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to ____ cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. Water Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: pounds per square foot. Thermal Movement: Resists thermal movement caused by 180 degrees F surface temperature without buckling stress on glass, joint seal failure, damaging loads on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction in performance or other detrimental effects. Condensation Resistance Factor: 63 minimum. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.45, maximum. Acoustical Performance: ASTM E90 and E1332; STC 31 and OITC 31 (fixed). Life Cycle Requirements: No damage to fasteners, hardware parts or other components that would render operable windows in operable and not reduction in air and water infiltration resistance when tested according to AAMA 910.

Fixed, Non-Operable Type:

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

Install sill and sill end angles.

Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

08 51 13 - 2

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Hardware for wood, hollow steel, aluminum, and __________ doors.

Hardware for fire-rated doors.

Electrically operated and controlled hardware.

Thresholds.

Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.

Section 08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors.

Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders; installation of cylinders.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.

BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).

BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).

BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).

BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).

BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).

BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13).

BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).

BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems, Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).

NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010.

NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2009.

UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.

Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed.

2012 / StaceyW

08 71 00 - 1

DOOR HARDWARE

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL A.

Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.

Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.

Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 7. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware and control components and to building power connection.

Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated. 1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D). 2. Secondary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D). a. Use secondary finish in kitchens, bathrooms, and other spaces containing chrome or stainless steel finished appliances, fittings, and equipment; provide primary finish on one side of door and secondary finish on other side if necessary. 3. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18. 4. Exceptions: a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance equivalent according to BHMA A156.18. b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal with painted finish. c. Door Closer Covers and Arms: Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. d. Aluminum Surface Trim and Gasket Housings: Anodized to match door, not to match other hardware. e. Hardware for Aluminum Storefront Doors: Finished to match door, except hand contact surfaces to be satin stainless steel.

2.02 HINGES A.

Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

2.03 PIVOTS 2.04 PUSH/PULLS A.

Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6.

2012 / StaceyW

08 71 00 - 2

DOOR HARDWARE

1. 2. 3.

Provide push and pull on doors not specified to have lockset, latchset, exit device, or auxiliary lock. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces. On glazed storefront doors, provide matching push/pull bars on both faces.

2.05 LOCKS AND LATCHES A.

Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. 5. In door sections, where a lock cylinder referenced to Section 08 71 00 is specified, furnish and install a mortise lock cylinder keyed to the building keying system.

Electrically Operated Locks: Fail secure unless otherwise indicated.

Lock Cylinders: Manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.

Keying: Grand master keyed.

Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch".

2.06 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS A.

Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows:

2.07 MORTISE LOCKSETS A.

Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.13, and as follows:

2.08 FLUSHBOLTS A.

Flushbolts: Lever extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of frame. 1. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply with code. 2. Floor Bolts: Provide dustproof strike except at metal thresholds.

2.09 EXIT DEVICES A.

Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3, and as follows:

2.10 CLOSERS A.

Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4. 1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door. 3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated. 4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to ensure the leaves close in proper order.

2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS A.

Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide overhead stop. 3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated.

2012 / StaceyW

08 71 00 - 3

DOOR HARDWARE

2.12 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS A.

Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22. 1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile of pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets on each door identified as a "smoke door" and 20-minute rated fire doors. 2. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top, sides, and meeting stiles of pairs. a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets functioning as both smoke and weather seals. 3. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated.

Thresholds: 1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated.

2.13 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A.

Protection Plates: 1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all-glass doors.

2.14 KEY CONTROLS A.

Key Management System: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of consecutively numbered duplicate key tags with hanging hole and snap catch. 1. Security Key Tags: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of matching key tags for permanent attachment to one key of each set. 2. Provide key collection envelopes, receipt cards, and index cards in quantity suitable to number of keys to be managed.

Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock. 1. Mounting: Wall-mounted. 2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 25 percent additional capacity. 3. Horizontal metal hook strips with replaceable labels covered with clear plastic. 4. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each. 5. Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer's standard color. 6. Key cabinet lock to building keying system.

Fire Department Lock Box: Heavy-duty, surface mounted, solid stainless-steel box with hinged door and interior gasket seal; single drill resistant lock with dust covers and tamper alarm. 1. Capacity: Holds 10 keys. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark bronze.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION A.

Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.

Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.

Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted:

3.03 ADJUSTING A.

Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00.

2012 / StaceyW

08 71 00 - 4

DOOR HARDWARE

Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

HARDWARE SETS END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

08 71 00 - 5

DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient tile and sheet. 2. Broadloom carpet. 3. Thin-set ceramic tile and stone tile.

Preparation of new concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.

Preparation of new wood-based floors and subfloors for installation of new floor coverings.

1.02 REFERENCES A.

ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2008.

ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.

Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited. 3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.

Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.

Remedial Floor Coating: Coating intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment or with only the addition of a skim coat of patching compound or adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A.

Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Specified remediation, if required. 3. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 4. Other preparation specified. 5. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 6. Protection.

Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.

2012 / StaceyW FLOORING PREPARATION

09 05 61 - 1

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR

Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire suspect floor area. Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area.

3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A.

Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.

3.03 PREPARATION A.

See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.

Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.

Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound.

Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.

3.04 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A.

Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.

3.05 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A.

Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.

3.06 PROTECTION A.

Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW FLOORING PREPARATION

09 05 61 - 2

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR

SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

Metal stud wall framing.

Acoustic insulation.

Gypsum wallboard.

Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).

ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2009a.

ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.

ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2009a.

ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008.

ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a.

ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2006.

ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.

ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.

GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A.

Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

2012 / StaceyW

09 21 16 - 1

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A.

Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.

Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A.

Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass-mat-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch. b. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.

2.04 ACCESSORIES A.

Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: __ inch.

Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

09 21 16 - 2

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2007.

ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2008.

ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2011.

ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.

Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.

Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360.

Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.

Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.

Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently.

Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.

Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.

Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.

Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

09 51 00 - 1

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 62 29 CORK FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Natural cork tile flooring.

Resilient wall base.

Field-applied floor finish.

Installation accessories.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM F386 - Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces; 2011.

ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.

ASTM F2055 - Standard Test Method for Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by Dial Gage Method; 2010.

BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.

SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

LEED Report: Report cork content by weight, post-industrial recycled content by weight, VOC emission, and urea-formaldehyde content of flooring; VOC content of adhesives.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Cork Floor Tiles:

Edge Trim, Transition Strips, and Moldings:

Resilient Wall Base: 1. Burke Flooring; Product ____: www.burkemercer.com. 2. Johnsonite, Inc; Product ____: www.johnsonite.com. 3. Roppe Corp; Product ____: www.roppe.com.

2.02 MATERIALS A.

Cork Floor Tiles: Cork granules bonded into sheets; cork throughout full thickness, free of hardback cork and foreign material; smooth top and bottom surfaces; bottom surface suitable for adhesive bonding; free of cracks, broken corners and edges, indentations, and anomalous color variations. 1. Wear Layer: Manufacturer's standard homogeneous composition through entire thickness. 2. Color and Pattern: As scheduled. 3. Face Dimensions: Either 12 by 12 inches or 300 by 300 mm. 4. Thickness: 5/32 inch, minimum. 5. Dimensional Tolerances: a. Squareness: Not more than 0.005 inch out of square when tested in accordance with ASTM F2055. b. Thickness: Maximum of plus / minus 0.005 inch deviation from specified thickness except for beveled edges, when tested in accordance with ASTM F386.

2012 / StaceyW

09 62 29 - 1

CORK FLOORING

c. 6.

Length and Width: Maximum of plus / minus 0.016 inch deviation from specified dimensions, when tested in accordance with ASTM F2055. Edges: Square.

Edge and Transition Strips and Moldings: Stainless steel, with brushed finish; stainless steel screws for attachment.

Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: 4 foot sections. 5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.

Adhesive and Primer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.

Field Finish: Water-based (no VOC) polyurethane varnish, specifically formulated to be flexible over cork flooring; recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FLOORING INSTALLATION A.

Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Mix tile from at least two containers to randomize shade variations when tile is placed.

Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

Set flooring in place, with tight joints; press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

Install tile in checkerboard pattern. Do not use less than 1/2 full size tile width at perimeter.

Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

Apply field finish in accordance with finish and flooring manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

09 62 29 - 2

CORK FLOORING

SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Surface preparation.

Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.

Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Elevator pit ladders. 3. Surfaces inside cabinets. 4. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.

Paints: 1. Color Wheel Paint, a Comex Group company: www.colorwheel.com. 2. Comex Group (Color Wheel, Frazee, General Paint, Kwal, or Parker): www.thecomexgroup.com. 3. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com. 4. Frazee Paint, a Comex Group Company: www.frazee.com. 5. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 6. Kwal Paint, a Comex Group company: www.kwalpaint.com. 7. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 8. Parker Paint Mfg Co Inc., a Comex Group company: www.parkerpaint.com. 9. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. 10. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.

Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A.

Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

2012 / StaceyW

09 90 00 - 1

PAINTING AND COATING

1. 2. 3. 4.

Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 61 16.

Colors: As indicated on drawings 1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.

Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.

Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.

3.02 APPLICATION A.

Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

2012 / StaceyW

09 90 00 - 2

PAINTING AND COATING

Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

09 90 00 - 3

PAINTING AND COATING

SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A.

Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings ; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name. 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown on the drawings ; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "In Use/Vacant" indicator. 7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on the drawings. 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers to be determined later, and braille.

Interior Directional and Informational Signs: 1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs.

Emergency Evacuation Maps:

Building Identification Signs:

1.02 SIGN TYPES A.

Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. 4. Suspended Mounting: Stainless steel suspension cables, cable clamps, and ceiling fastener suitable for attachment to ceiling construction indicated.

Radius / Curved Signs: One-piece, curved extruded aluminum media holder securing flat, flexible sign media by curved lip on two sides; other two sides closed by end caps; concealed mounting attachment. 1. Sizes: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Finish: Natural (clear) anodized. 3. Sign Orientation: Curved in horizontal section. 4. End Caps: Plastic, color selected from manufacturer's standard colors, paintable. 5. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Mechanical anchorage, with predrilled holes, and set in clear silicone sealant.

Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: Clear. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

1.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A.

Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color:

2012 / StaceyW

10 14 00 - 1

SIGNAGE

Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

2.02 INSTALLATION A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.

Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

10 14 00 - 2

SIGNAGE

SECTION 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Food service equipment.

Connections to utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.

Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.

NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

1.04 WARRANTY A.

See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A.

Equipment Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section.

Installation Accessories: Provide all rough-in hardware, supports and connections, attachment devices, closure trim, and accessories required for complete installation.

2.02 MATERIALS A.

Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.

Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 Type 304 commercial grade, No. 4 finish.

Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS ; acid-resistant ; ________ color ; textured, low gloss finish.

Laminate Backing Sheets: NEMA LD 3, BKL; unfinished, plastic laminate.

Finish Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.

Work Surfaces: Stainless steel.

Fittings: Sink drains with crumb cup and waste fittings and faucets.

Sealants: ________ type, as specified in Section 07 90 05.

2.03 FABRICATION A.

Install rubber button feet on bearing surface of any item positioned on a finished surface.

Isolate rotating or reciprocating machinery to prevent noise and vibration.

2.04 FINISHES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location.

Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION A.

Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.

2012 / StaceyW

11 40 00 - 1

FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

Provide sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting components.

3.03 ADJUSTING A.

Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions.

Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration.

3.04 CLEANING A.

Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces.

Wash and clean equipment.

Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

11 40 00 - 2

FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

SECTION 22 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).

IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.

NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009, Revision 1 - 2010.

NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.

Lincoln Motors; Model ______: www.lincolnmotors.com.

2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A.

Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 27 17 for required electrical characteristics.

Construction: 1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor, efficiency.

Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame.

2.03 APPLICATIONS 2.04 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A.

Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.

Starting Current: Six times full load current.

Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics.

Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors.

Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.

Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

2012 / StaceyW PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

22 05 13 - 1

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR

Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter; refer to Section 26 29 13.

Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.

Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

3.02 SCHEDULES A.

NEMA Open Motor Service Factors. 1. 1/6-1/3 hp:

Three Phase - Energy Efficient, Open Drip-Proof Performance: 1. 1200 rpm. a. 1-1/2 hp: END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

22 05 13 - 2

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR

SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Water heaters.

Packaged water heating systems.

Pumps. 1. Circulators.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume I - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less; 2009.

ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters; 2008.

ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

1.03 CERTIFICATIONS A.

Water Heaters: NSF approved.

Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3, as applicable, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere.

Pressure Vessels for Heat Exchangers: ASME labeled, to ASME (BPV VIII, 1).

Water Tanks: ASME labeled, to ASME (BPV VIII, 1).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PACKAGED WATER HEATING SYSTEMS A.

System: Gas-fired direct heating boiler, circulating pump, controls, piping and valving as indicated , storage tank , all mounted on structural steel skid.

Boiler: 1. Type: Gas-fired water tube boiler, with copper finned tube heat exchanger, steel jacket with glass fiber insulation. 2. Boiler Trim: Gas burner, thermometer and pressure gauge, immersion thermostats for operating and high limit protection, 100 percent safety shut-off electric gas valve with transformer, electronic safety pilot and pilot burner, gas pressure regulator, manual gas shut-off, low water cut off, ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, coil relief valve, automatic boiler fill and expansion tank, draft inverter. 3. Performance:

Vertical storage tank: 1. Working pressure: 150 psi ASME labelled. 2. Lining: 15 mils thick epoxy lining extended through flanges and couplings. 3. Support: Two welded tank saddles not less than 4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick, mounted on 2 inch pipe stand with minimum four cross braced legs; sheet teflon isolation strip between tank and saddle; dielectric unions between tank and piping system. 4. Insulation: 3 inch glass fiber insulation with steel jacket.

Pump: 1. Type: All bronze, in-line circulation pump mounted on boiler, controlled by tank mounted immersion thermostat.

Thermostatic Valve: Three-way, self-contained, full line size, bronze body 1/2 to 2 inches size, iron body 2-1/2 inches and over, set at 140 degrees F.

2012 / StaceyW

22 30 00 - 1

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

2.02 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A.

Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly.

Impeller: Bronze.

Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.

Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.

Drive: Flexible coupling.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any.

Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system.

Pumps: 1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

22 30 00 - 2

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A.

1.02 APPLICATIONS END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW HVAC EQUIPMENT

23 05 13 - 1

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR

SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.

See Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements for overall objectives; comply with the requirements of Section 01 91 13.

This section covers the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning; each subcontractor or installer responsible for the installation of a particular system or equipment item to be commissioned is responsible for the commissioning activities relating to that system or equipment item.

The Commissioning Authority (CA) directs and coordinates all commissioning activities and provides Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Contractor's use.

The entire HVAC system is to be commissioned, including commissioning activities for the following specific items: 1. Control system. 2. Major and minor equipment items. 3. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as requiring commissioning.

The Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test requirements specified in this section are in addition to, not a substitute for, inspection or testing specified in other sections.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A.

Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Authority informed of all changes to control system documentation made during programming and setup; revise and resubmit when substantial changes are made.

DRAFT Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Control System: Detailed written plan indicating the procedures to be followed to test, checkout and adjust the control system prior to full system Functional Testing; include at least the following for each type of equipment controlled: 1. System name. 2. List of devices. 3. Step-by-step procedures for testing each controller after installation, including: a. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation. b. Process of downloading programs to local controllers and verifying that they are addressed correctly. c. Process of performing operational checks of each controlled component. d. Plan and process for calibrating valve and damper actuators and all sensors. e. Description of the expected field adjustments for transmitters, controllers and control actuators should control responses fall outside of expected values. 4. Copy of proposed log and field checkout sheets to be used to document the process; include space for initial and final read values during calibration of each point and space to specifically indicate when a sensor or controller has â&#x20AC;&#x153;passedâ&#x20AC;? and is operating within the contract parameters. 5. Description of the instrumentation required for testing. 6. Indicate what tests on what systems should be completed prior to TAB using the control system for TAB work. Coordinate with the Commissioning Authority and TAB contractor for this determination.

Startup Reports, Prefunctional Checklists, and Trend Logs: Submit for approval of Commissioning Authority.

HVAC Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation specified elsewhere, compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system:

2012 / StaceyW

23 08 00 - 1

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Specific step-by-step instructions on how to perform and apply all functions, features, modes, etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other features of this system. Provide an index and clear table of contents. Include the detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms. Full as-built set of control drawings. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment. Full points list; in addition to the information on the original points list submittal, include a listing of all rooms with the following information for each room: a. Floor. b. Room number. c. Room name. d. Air handler unit ID. e. Reference drawing number. f. Air terminal unit tag ID. g. Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID. h. Minimum air flow rate. i. Maximum air flow rate. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system. Full as-built print out of software program. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and HVAC drawings with their control system designations. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and methods by sensor type, etc. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc. Warranty requirements. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not commissioning tests). Organize and subdivide the manual with permanently labeled tabs for each of the following data in the given order: a. Sequences of operation. b. Control drawings. c. Points lists. d. Controller and/or module data. e. Thermostats and timers. f. Sensors and DP switches. g. Valves and valve actuators. h. Dampers and damper actuators. i. Program setups (software program printouts).

Project Record Documents: See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements. 1. Submit updated version of control system documentation, for inclusion with operation and maintenance data. 2. Show actual locations of all static and differential pressure sensors (air, water and building pressure) and air-flow stations on project record drawings.

Draft Training Plan: In addition to requirements specified in Section 01 79 00, include: 1. Follow the recommendations of ASHRAE Guideline 1. 2. Control system manufacturer's recommended training. 3. Demonstration and instruction on function and overrides of any local packaged controls not controlled by the HVAC control system.

Training Manuals: See Section 01 79 00 for additional requirements. 1. Provide three extra copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual from the O&M manuals.

2012 / StaceyW

23 08 00 - 2

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A.

Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.

Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in development of the Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures.

Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Authority.

Prepare a preliminary schedule for HVAC pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completion for use by the Commissioning Authority; update the schedule as appropriate.

Notify the Commissioning Authority when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, startup of each piece of equipment and testing, adjusting, and balancing will occur; when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction notify ahead of time and be proactive in seeing that the Commissioning Authority has the scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.

Put all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continue operation during each working day of testing, adjusting, and balancing and commissioning, as required.

Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed to allow air measurements and air balancing; close with an approved plug.

Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with the contract documents.

3.02 INSPECTING AND TESTING - GENERAL A.

Submit startup plans, startup reports, and Prefunctional Checklists for each item of equipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

Perform the Functional Tests directed by the Commissioning Authority for each item of equipment or other assembly to be commissioned.

Provide two-way radios for use during the testing.

Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check: 1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system readout. 2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode. 3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required. 4. Command valve/damper open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. 5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions. 6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).

Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not by coils. 1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed. 2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.

2012 / StaceyW

23 08 00 - 3

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to Owner.

3.03 TAB COORDINATION A.

TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC.

Coordinate commissioning schedule with TAB schedule.

Review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system toward completing TAB.

Provide all necessary unique instruments and instruct the TAB technicians in their use; such as handheld control system interface for setting terminal unit boxes, etc.

Have all required Prefunctional Checklists, calibrations, startup and component Functional Tests of the system completed and approved by the Commissioning Authority prior to starting TAB.

Provide a qualified control system technician to operate the controls to assist the TAB technicians or provide sufficient training for the TAB technicians to operate the system without assistance.

3.04 CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTING A.

Prefunctional Checklists for control system components will require a signed and dated certification that all system programming is complete as required to accomplish the requirements of the Contract Documents and the detailed Sequences of Operation documentation submittal.

Do not start Functional Testing until all controlled components have themselves been successfully Functionally Tested in accordance with the contract documents.

Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the Functional Testing of the control system as required by the Commissioning Authority.

Functional Testing of the control system constitutes demonstration and trend logging of control points monitored by the control system. 1. The scope of trend logging is partially specified; trend log up to 50 percent more points than specified at no extra cost to Owner. 2. Perform all trend logging specified in Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test procedures.

Functionally Test integral or stand-alone controls in conjunction with the Functional Tests of the equipment they are attached to, including any interlocks with other equipment or systems; further testing during control system Functional Test is not required unless specifically indicated below.

Demonstrate the following to the Commissioning Authority during testing of controlled equipment; coordinate with commissioning of equipment. 1. Setpoint changing features and functions. 2. Sensor calibrations.

Demonstrate to the Commissioning Authority: 1. That all specified functions and features are set up, debugged and fully operable. 2. That scheduling features are fully functional and setup, including holidays. 3. That all graphic screens and value readouts are completed. 4. Correct date and time setting in central computer. 5. That field panels read the same time as the central computer; sample 10 percent of field panels; if any of those fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail test all remaining units at no extra cost to Owner. 6. Functionality of field panels using local operator keypads and local ports (plug-ins) using portable computer/keypad; demonstrate 100 percent of panels and 10 percent of ports; if any ports fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test all remaining units at no extra cost to Owner. 7. Power failure and battery backup and power-up restart functions.

2012 / StaceyW

23 08 00 - 4

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. H.

Global commands features. Security and access codes. Occupant over-rides (manual, telephone, key, keypad, etc.). O&M schedules and alarms. Occupancy sensors and controls. All control strategies and sequences not tested during controlled equipment testing.

If the control system, integral control components, or related equipment do not respond to changing conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, as specified and according to acceptable operating practice, under any of the conditions, sequences, or modes tested, correct all systems, equipment, components, and software required at no additional cost to Owner.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements.

Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to Owner.

Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.

Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to Owner.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.

See Section 01 79 00 for additional requirements.

Demonstrate operation and maintenance of HVAC system to Owner' personnel; if during any demonstration, the system fails to perform in accordance with the information included in the O&M manual, stop demonstration, repair or adjust, and repeat demonstration. Demonstrations may be combined with training sessions if appropriate.

These demonstrations are in addition to, and not a substitute for, Prefunctional Checklists and demonstrations to the Commissioning Authority during Functional Testing.

Provide classroom and hands-on training of Owner's designated personnel on operation and maintenance of the HVAC system, control system, and all equipment items indicated to be commissioned. Provide the following minimum durations of training:

TAB Review: Instruct Owner's personnel for minimum ____ hours, after completion of TAB, on the following: 1. Review final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type. 2. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect the proper delivery of air or water. 3. Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that are close to or are not meeting their design capacity. 4. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not finished. 5. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB.

HVAC Control System Training: Perform training in at least three phases: 1. Phase 1 - Basic Control System: Provide minimum of ____ hours of actual training on the control system itself. Upon completion of training, each attendee, using appropriate documentation, should be able to perform elementary operations and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of the system. a. This training may be held on-site or at the manufacturer's facility. b. If held off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the system installation. c. For off-site training, Contractor shall pay expenses of up to two attendees. 2. Phase 2 - Integrating with HVAC Systems: Provide minimum of ____ hours of on-site, hands-on training after completion of Functional Testing. Include instruction on:

2012 / StaceyW

23 08 00 - 5

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

The specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this facility and specific instruction for operating the installed system, including interfaces with other systems, if any. b. Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and restart routines, changing setpoints and alarms and other typical changed parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, optional control strategies that can be considered, energy savings strategies and set points that if changed will adversely affect energy consumption, energy accounting, procedures for obtaining vendor assistance, etc. c. Trend logging and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization, etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and printing trends; provide practice in setting up trend logging and monitoring during training session. d. Every display screen, allowing time for questions. e. Point database entry and modifications. Phase 3 - Post-Occupancy: Six months after occupancy conduct minimum of ____ hours of training. Tailor training session to questions and topics solicited beforehand from Owner. Also be prepared to address topics brought up and answer questions concerning operation of the system.

Provide the services of manufacturer representatives to assist instructors where necessary.

Provide the services of the HVAC controls instructor at other training sessions, when requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

23 08 00 - 6

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Metal ductwork.

Duct cleaning.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A.

All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.

Dishwasher Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A.

Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.

Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

2.03 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.

Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.

Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

3.02 CLEANING A.

Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

23 31 00 - 1

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Occupancy sensors.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.

Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

Section 26 09 19 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.

Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches, wall dimmers, fan speed controllers, and wall plates.

Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting.

Section 26 55 61 - Theatrical Lighting: Controls for stage lighting units.

Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A.

See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A.

Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A.

Manufacturers:

All Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated. 2. Sensor Technology: a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing movement of thermal energy between zones. b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves. c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies.

2012 / StaceyW

26 09 23 - 1

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

d. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and audible sound sensing technologies. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, up to a maximum time delay setting of not less than 15 minutes and not more than 30 minutes. Compatibility: Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low-voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum load requirements. Where wired sensors are indicated, wireless sensors are acceptable provided that all components and wiring modifications necessary for proper operation are included. Wireless Sensors: a. RF Range: 30 feet through typical construction materials. b. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for Class B application. c. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life.

Power Packs for Wireless Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained relay compatible with specified wireless occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. 3. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates.

Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices.

Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.

Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION A.

Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section.

Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.

Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 27 26.

2012 / StaceyW

26 09 23 - 2

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

3.03 CLEANING A.

Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

26 09 23 - 3

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.

NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A.

Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

26 51 00 - 1

INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 55 61 THEATRICAL LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Stage lighting units and lamps.

Dimmers and control units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL COMPONENTS A.

Lighting Dimming and Control System: For stage area and house lighting.

Dimmers: Portable dimming unit suitable for mounting at lighting unit.

2.02 STAGE LIGHTING UNITS AND ACCESSORIES A.

Furnish products as indicated in Schedule attached to this section. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

26 55 61 - 1

THEATRICAL LIGHTING

SECTION 31 09 16.21 PILE LOAD TESTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Pile load testing and documenting results.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Monitor test pile placement and elevations under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

Maintain one copy of each test method document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A.

Provide equipment, load carrying devices, loads, and instrumentation as required by test methods specified in PART 3.

Test Crib: Provide one test crib for pile load testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A.

Load test the following: 1. 6 indicator piles at locations as directed.

Perform the following tests on each test pile: 1. Subject piles to 1-3/4 times design load.

Acceptable Permanent Set of Piles After Load Testing: 1/8 inch.

If tested piles do not conform to requirements, perform additional testing of other piles. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

31 09 16.21 - 1

PILE LOAD TESTS

SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.

Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.

Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.

Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.

Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products.

Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling.

Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Topsoil removal.

Section 32 93 00 - Plants: Relocation of existing trees, shrubs, and other plants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A.

Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00.

Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A.

Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.

Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.

Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.

Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

3.03 VEGETATION A.

Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure, paving, playing fields, lawns, and planting beds.

Do not begin clearing until vegetation to be relocated has been removed.

Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the following limits: 1. 40 feet outside the building perimeter. 2. 10 feet each side of surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utility lines less than 12 inches in diameter. 3. 15 feet each side of roadway curbs and main utility trenches. 4. 25 feet outside perimeter of pervious paving areas that must not be compacted by construction traffic.

Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain: 1. At vegetation removal limits.

In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious paving, remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil.

Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated.

2012 / StaceyW

31 10 00 - 1

SITE CLEARING

1. 2. 3. G.

Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 18 inches. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed.

Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner.

3.04 DEBRIS A.

Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

31 10 00 - 2

SITE CLEARING

SECTION 31 22 00 GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Removal of topsoil.

Rough grading and ________ the site for site structures, building pads, and ________.

Finish grading .

PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.

Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.

3.02 PREPARATION A.

Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

Stake and flag locations of known utilities.

3.03 FINISH GRADING A.

Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.

Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products.

In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.

Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

31 22 00 - 1

GRADING

SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Fertilizing.

Sod installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.

Fertilizer: ________________; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated by analysis.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FERTILIZING A.

Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.

Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.

Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.

Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.

3.02 LAYING SOD A.

Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.

Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration.

Lay sod smooth and tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.

Where new sod adjoins existing grass areas, align top surfaces.

Where sod is placed adjacent to hard surfaces, such as curbs, pavements, etc., place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below top of hard surface.

Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.

After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities. Roll sodded areas with roller not exceeding ____ lbs. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

32 92 23 - 1

SODDING

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 PLANTS A.

Plants: Species and size identified in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the work. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

32 93 00 - 1

PLANTS

SECTION 33 41 11 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.

Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.

Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A.

Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A.

See Section 31 23 16.13 for additional requirements.

Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling.

3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A.

Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal sewer system. END OF SECTION

2012 / StaceyW

33 41 11 - 1

SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

The Book

Bookstore, Coffee shop, and Bar

The Book Bookstore, Coffee shop, & Bar

The Purpose

•A place where people can study • Shop for their favorite book •Have a good cup of coffee

•Have a drink •Listen to good music

Location Hardy street and North Tenth street Located next to Laser Mainia . Delete text and place photo here. • Front setback of 30ft •Side setback of 15ft • Structure shall not exceed 30ft

Occupancy Type

Occupancy Assembly: occupancies should include social, recreational, and entertainment A2- Food and drink establishments Mercantile: The display and sale of retail

Construction Type Type III B •non- combustible exterior walls •Code permitted interior materials Structure  11” deep steel lightweight floor joists for the

first floor  6inch lightweight steel frame, 16 inch on

center for fist floor  3 5/8 inch lightweight steel frame for the

second floor  20” deep open web second floor and roof steel

joists  2- 20” Steel beams run through the first floor  5 -W8- 9”x8” steel columns

Program

Room Name Book Store Study Area Balcony Womens Restroom Mens Restroom Stairs Stairs Coffee Shop Second Floor Corridor Storage Bar Elevator Mech. Womens Restroom Mens Restroom Grand total:

Room Program Area (SF) sqft. Per Occupant Occupancy 1956 100 19.56 1215 15 81 223 15 14.8666667 166 1 166 162 1 162 198 142 961 200 4.805 100 725 300 2.41666667 2270 15 151.333333 70 160 130 120 8598

601.981667

First Floor Plan

Second Floor Plan

HVAC System • Roof top • Variable Air Volume • Single packaged • Multi zone • SEER 13

Electrical System

• Three phase transformer • Service size 120/240 at 378amps • Lighting, duplex outlets, and equipment circuits

Electrical System

Cost Estimate (Open Shop)

% of Total

Cost Per SF

Total

Cost

$94.8

$849,200

25%

$23.7

$212,300

Architectural Fees

$5.69

$50,970

User Fees

$124.19

$1,112,470

Contractor Fees (GC, Overhead, Profit)

Total Building Cost

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Bookstore/Coffeeshop/Bar D

Stacey Williams

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

CODE RESEARCH SECTION 503 GENERAL BUILDING HEIGHT AND AREA LIMITATIONS 503.1 General. The building height and area shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 503 based on the type of construction as determined by Section 602 and the occupancies as determined by Section 302 except as modified hereafter. Each portion of a building separated by one or more fire walls complying with Section 706 shall be considered to be a separate building. TABLE 503

ALLOWABLE BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREASa Building height limitations shown in feet above grade plane. Story limitations shown as stories above grade plane. Building area limitations shown in square feet, as determined by the definition of “Area, building,” per story

A-2 M

Type III A B Height 65 ft. 55ft. Stories 3 2 Area (SF) 14000 9500 Stories Area (SF)

4 2 18000

12500

ACT 400-Senior Projects

A-2 Assembly uses intended for food and/or drink consumption including, but not limited to: Banquet halls Night clubs Restaurants Taverns and bars SECTION 309 MERCANTILE GROUP M 309.1 Mercantile Group M. Mercantile Group M occupancy includes, among others, the use of a building or structure or a portion thereof, for the display and sale of merchandise and involves stocks of goods, wares or merchandise incidental to such purposes and accessible to the public. Mercantile occupancies shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Department stores Drug stores Markets Motor fuel-dispensing facilities Retail or wholesale

118 College Drive Hattiesburg, MS 39406-0001

Project number Date N

Drawn by Checked by

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SECTION 303 ASSEMBLY GROUP A 303.1 Assembly Group A. Assembly Group A occupancy includes, among others, the use of a building or structure, or a portion thereof, for the gathering of persons for purposes such as civic, social or religious functions; recreation, food or drink consumption or awaiting transportation.

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Stacey Williams Checked

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

DEMOLITION NOTES D

1) REMVOE ALL EXISTING CONSTRUCTIONS AND FINISHES NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE WORK AS DEPICTED ON THE DRAWINGS. PATCH AS REQUIRED, ALL CONSTRUCTIONS TO REMAIN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS. WHERE CONTRACTOR IS DESIGNATED TO MAKE REMOVALS, DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS IS THE RESPONSIBILTY OF THE CONTRACTOR. vERIFY WITH OWNER, THE DISPOSITION AND REMOVAL ANY COMPONENTS OF SAVLAGEABLE VALUE.

Dearborn Street 21 3

North 10th Street

3) CONRACTOR IS TO FIELD LOCATE PROPSED SITE IMPROVMENTS FOR VERIFICATION BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. 4) CONTRACTOR IS TO CLEAN AND FLUSH ALL RCP STORM DRAINS WITHIN THE PROJECT LIMITS FOR INSPECTION BEFORE AND AFTER COMPLETION OF THE CONSTRUCTION 5) AN ON-SITE PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING MUST BE HELD PRIOR RO ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY ON SITE

LEDGEND

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Existing Asphalt

C CONTOUR LINES

TELEPHONE POLE

SETBACK LINES

BUS STOP

15' setback

190' 6"

10' setback

21 3

SRTEET CENTER LINES

GRASS

2 21

21 2

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

30' Setback

Sidewalk 556981

Bus Stop

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

Hardy Street

A Demolition Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

10'

20'

40'

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Stacey Williams Checked

80'

AD- 101 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

2) ALL REMOVALS AND SALVAGE, UNLESS SPECIFICALY NOTED OR REQUESTED BY THE OWNER SHALL BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR.

137' 6"

Stacey Williams

Scale

1/16"= 1' 0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

concrete side walk

190' 6"

2"R 6"

1/4"

12"

18' - 0"

Wearing Surface

Stacey Williams

3/4"R

Base

21' - 8"

Compacted Subgrade

NOTE: When used on high side of roadways, the cross slope of the gutter shall match the cross slope of the adjacent pavement and the thickness of the lip shall be 6", unless otherwise shown on plans.

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Porous Asphalt

S S S

137' 6"

24"

C Curb Cross Section Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

15 Spaces @ 9' 0"

14'-8"

TIE BEAM WITH 1-#5 REBAR CONTINUOUS

15' setback

6" CONC. SLAB

10'-8"

48" Max

SLOPE 1/4" PER 1-FT.

12' CLEARANCE MIN. 6" DIA. STEEL BOLLARDS CONC. FILLED (TYP)

SWING GATE (TYP.)

1-#5 AT 4' CENTER 6'

12' CLEARANCE MIN.

DROP PIN (TYP.) Grade

Grade 14"

North 10th Street

SWING GATE (TYP.)

Dearborn Street

4' Min.

20'

40'

DROP PIN HOLE (TYP.)

N.T.S.

1'-0"

STANDARD PRE-PAINTED DISABLED PARKING SIGN ON 1/8" THICK SHEET ALUMINUM

80'

WHITE BORDER & SYMBOL BLUE BACKGROUND

BLACK BORDER & LETTERS WHITE BACKGROUND

(TOP OF THE SIGN)

Re s 5' m iden tia in. Art l St. eri al St.

BLACK BORDER & LETTERS WHITE BACKGROUND

$255 FINE F.S. 318.18

7'-0"

N.T.S.

Site Legend

(MIDDLE OF THE SIGN)

SID

O Re n Ex TY co PE ns ist. F IC tru ac UR c as t C ilitie B Ne urb s R ce ssa & Pa emo r y. ve ve & me nt

(BOTTOM OF THE SIGN)

NOTE: ALL LETTERS - 1" SERIES "C"

Contour

8" X 2'-6" CONCRETE MASS. FINISH TOP OF MASS LEVEL WITH A SLIGHT RAISED WASH APPROXIMATELY 1/2" ABOVE LEVEL OF TURF/SOD.

VALLEY GUTTER CURB

If "x" is less than 48" then the slope of the flared side shall not exceed 12:1.

CURB

DROP

CURB

TRANSITION

CURB

TRANSITION

CONC. RAMP Textured Surface

BACK OF SIDEWALK

12:1 MAX.

Site Plan

SECTION B-B ELEVATION A-A

FLOW LINE

SIDEWALK CURB CUT RAMPS PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED

Property

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

2'-6"

Setback

556981

EW AL K

ISOMETRIC VIEW

Bus Stop Sign

12' GALVANIZED U-CHANNEL POST (2.5 LBS. PER FDOT SPEC.)

Benchmark

N.T.S.

CO NC .

ELEVATION

4' m in.

1'-6"

PARKING BY DISABLED PERMIT ONLY

Telephone Post

3000 P.S.I. CONCRETE SLAB WITH FIBER MESH REINFORCING MONOLITHIC, MIN 6" THICKNESS, 6"X6"/ 10X10 W.W.F.

Dumpster Enclosure Detail 3/4" = 1'-0"

10'

8"X 16" CONCRETE FOOTING W/ 2- #5 REBAR (TYP.)

PLAN

N 0'

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Hardy Street

9' - 0"

18' - 0"

10' - 0"

S 8"

NOTES: 1. Ramps are designed to the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. Ramps Shall Have a Tactile Surface, Textured to a Depth Not Exceeding 1/8" by use of Tamp or rollerIn Conformance with Requirements of FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design Standards, Detail 304 Or Most Recent Modifications.

Project number Date

Centerline

Drawn by

Handicap Signage Detail 3/4" = 1'-0"

Checked by

Sidewalk Ramp Detail 3/4" = 1'-0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

AS- 101 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

concrete side walk

6' - 4" S

9' - 3"

concrete

9' - 0"

30' setback

8' - 0"

ELEVATION 1' 0"

2" 3"R

9' - 0"

7-1/2"

10' setback

4" Drop at All Drives

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SCUPPER

SCUPPER.

A- 301

A- 304

A- 302

A1 A- 303

SCUPPER

12K5

SCUPPER

12K5

Stacey Williams

ACT 400-Senior Projects

12K5

C 12K5

12K5

SCUPPER

12K5

A- 305

N 0'

A- 301

A- 304

16'

SCUPPER

SCUPPER.

A- 302

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A1 A- 303

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A First Floor Structural Plan Project number Date Drawn by

Bathroom of First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan 2 3/8" = 1'-0"

Checked by

Storage Room Undereth Balcony Reflected Ceiling Plan 3 1/4" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

12K5

A- 305

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

S- 101 4

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 301

A1 Scupper

A- 304 Scupper

A- 303

A- 302 Scupper

Scupper

20M

Stacey Williams

D 20L

Scupper

12K5

20K

ACT 400-Senior Projects

C 20I

Scupper

20A

20B

20C

20H

A1 A- 301 A1 A- 304

20D

20E

16'

20F

20G

A- 302

A- 303

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Second Floor Reflected Ceiling plan and 2012 Structural 28 Feburary 2012

Project number Date

Author Checker

Drawn by Checked by

S- 102 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

20J

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 304

A- 302

A- 303

24' - 6"

22' - 2"

15' - 6"

8' - 8"

Stacey Williams

D A

A-A

A1 A- 305

35' - 9"

5' 0"SQ X 18" FTG. W/ 3 #4 EACH WAY IN 4 PLACES

F2 49' - 4"

F1 B A1 A- 305

A F1

F1 F1

A 8' - 11"

A F1 A A F1 A F1 4' - 8"

7' - 2"

12' - 9"

24' - 8"

48' - 4"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Brick Veneer

Airspace

A- 304

A- 302

A- 303

5/8" Sheathing

2x4 Wd. Stud

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES BLANKET INSULATION

16'

AIR BARRIERS

Brick Tie

2x4 Base Plate

Rubber Base

Finish Floor Brick Weep @ 24" O.C. 3/4" Plywd. Sheathing

2x12 Floor Joist Non-shrinking Grout

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

2x12 Rim Joist

BLANKET INSULATION DAMPPROOFING

TERMITE CONTROL

2x6 P.T. Sill Plate

Anchor Bolt

556981

1 1/2" Rigid Bd. Insul.

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

FOUNDATION SCHEDULE FOOTING SIZE

FOOTING TYPE

Gravel Fill SUBDRAINAGE Perf. Fnd. Drain in Sleeve

CONTINOUS FOOTING

1' 6" WIDE, 1' 6" DEEP

VAPOR RETARDERS

COLUMN FOOTING

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

CONTINOUS FOOTING

1'-0"

Foundation Plan

Refer to Structural

Bottom of Footing

Gravel Fill

2'-0"

Project number

WALL SCHEDULE WALL TYPE

Date

WALL SIZE

Drawn by

12"

A-A

Footing 1" = 1'-0"

Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

S- 103 2

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 301

A- 304

A- 302

A- 303

8' - 6"

D.S.

Women's Restroom 105

Men's Restroom 104

7' - 4"

7' - 7"

10L

10K

8' - 0"

D.S.

10J

D.S.

1' - 10"

D.S.

40' - 2"

7' - 5" Light weight concrete quoin

10I

Stacey Williams

D 207G

7' - 8"

30' - 9"

Total First Floor Area: 3,996 SF

94' - 10"

A1 A- 505

10H 105A

104A

101A

25' - 6"

5' - 0"

10' - 9"

26' - 10"

5' - 10"

C 9' - 2"

9' - 2"

107A

Stairs 107

A- 305

13' - 6"

Elevator

106A

Book Store 101

101C

Stairs 106

10F

106B

light weight concrete quoin

39' - 4"

Light weight concrete quoin

23' - 0"

3' - 8"

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

8' - 6"

26' - 8"

3' - 10"

D.S.

22' - 4"

8' - 5"

10C

10D

7' - 4"

22' - 8"

7' - 6"

UP UP

10B

10' - 3"

8' - 3"

10' - 11"

10A

10E

D.S.

7' - 4"

Light weight concrete quoin

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

13' - 5"

50' - 5" 99' - 9"

A1 A1

A- 301

16'

A- 302

A- 303

A- 304

Wall Type Legend

A- 505

556981

Exterior- Brick on insulated CMU Wall

0' - 8"

B4 A- 505

0' - 11"

Exterior- Flagstone on insulated CMU Wall

1' - 4"

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A First Floor Plan

Interior- CMU Wall

Project number Interior- 4 7/8" 1 hour Wall

Date Drawn by

Interior- 6" Plumbing Wall

Checked by

Balcony 3/16" = 1'-0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Stacey Williams Stacey Wiliams

A- 101 2

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

10G

51' - 5"

0' - 5"

46' - 9"

29' - 1"

8' - 5"

35' - 10"

A- 305

ACT 400-Senior Projects

25' - 11"

A- 505

8' - 5"

Storage 102

21' - 7"

105B

Scale

3/16" = 1' 0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A1 A- 301

A- 304

A- 302

A- 303

94' - 10" 13' - 5"

5' - 3"

20' - 7"

D.S.

14' - 0"

D.S.

33' - 10"

D.S.

7' - 9"

D.S.

20M

Coffee Shop 203

7' - 8"

205A

Lady's Restroom 205

Stacey Williams

Storage 202

20L

D.S.

Corridor 204

27' - 8"

8' - 6"

206A

Bar 201

51' - 5"

20J

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Mech. 207

46' - 9"

A- 305

20K

8' - 4"

Mens Restroom 206

6' - 8"

207A

Elevator 208

107B

20I DN

A- 305

106C DN

20B

20C

10' - 11"

20A

23' - 8"

12' - 8"

D.S.

20H

7' - 6"

Stage

A4 A- 503

20D D.S.

20E

20G

20F

D.S.

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

D.S. A4 A- 504

26' - 8"

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

8' - 6"

3' - 10"

11' - 8"

10' - 8"

7' - 4"

13' - 5"

99' - 9"

16'

A- 304

A1 A- 302

A1 A- 301

A- 303

556981

0' - 11"

Wall Type Legend

0' - 8"

1' - 4"

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

Exterior- Flagstone on insulated CMU Wall

A Exterior- Brick on insulated CMU Wall

Second Floor Plan

Interior- CMU Wall Project number Date Interior- 4 7/8" 1 hour Wall

Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

Interior- 6" Plumbing Wall

A- 102 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

35' - 10"

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

CONCRETE CONICE MOLDING

Down Spout

Down Spout Down Spout

Roof 28' - 0"

PRECAST CONCRETE QUOIN

16' - 6"

Stacey Williams

CONCRETE WALL SWEEP FABRIC AWNING

CORONADO CARAMEL MOUNTAIN LEDGESTONE FLATS

CONCRETE WALL SWEEP

COMMON BOND BRICK MASONRY

Second Floor 18' - 0" FABRIC AWNING

COMMON BOND BRICK MASONRY

ACT 400-Senior Projects

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

Grade 0' - 0"

1 A- 201

West Elevation 3/16" = 1'-0"

DOWN SPOUT

CONCRETE CORNICE MOLDING

DOWN SPOUT

Roof 28' - 0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B PRECAST CONCRETE QUOIN

pRECAST CONCRETE QUOIN

16' - 6"

COMMON BOND BRICK MASONRY

Second Floor 18' - 0"

FABRIC AWNING

Balcony 9' - 0" 556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

Grade 0' - 0" 2 A- 201

East Elevation 3/16" = 1'-0"

Elevations Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 201 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Balcony 9' - 0"

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

CONCRETE CORNICE MOLDING

DOWN SPOUT

Roof 28' - 0"

20H

20I

20J

FABRIC AWNING

20K

20L

17' - 6"

PRECAST CONCRETE QUOIN

Second Floor 18' - 0"

FABRIC AWNING

Balcony 9' - 0"

101A

107A

10F

ACT 400-Senior Projects

10G

10H

First Floor Plan 1' - 6" Grade 0' - 0"

1 A- 202

South Elevation 1/4" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B CONCRETE CORNICE MOLDING

DOWN SPOUT

DOWN SPUOT

DOWN SPOUT

Roof 28' - 0"

DOWN SPOUT

PRECAST CONRETE QUOIN COMMON BOND BRICK MASONRY

Second Floor 18' - 0" FABRIC AWNING

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

Balcony 9' - 0"

A SPLASH BLOCK

Elevations

First Floor Plan 1' - 6" Project number

Grade 0' - 0"

Date Drawn by Checked by

2 A- 202

North Elevation 3/16" = 1'-0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 202 2

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

COMMON BOND BRICK MASONRY

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

4' - 0"

Faucet

Adj. Shelves Beyond Shown Dashed

Ref

ACT 400-Senior Projects

3' - 0"

Undercounter Refrigerator Covered Ruber Base

C1 A- 203

Coffeeshop- East 3/4" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B 5' - 3"

2' - 6"

6' - 10"

2' - 9"

556981

Acrillic Splash Gaurd

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

Backsplash at Walls Pastry Case

A Millwork Project number Date Kickspace

A1 A- 203

Kickspace

Drawn by Checked by

Coffeeshop- West 3/4" = 1'-0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 203 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Backsplash at Walls

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

3' - 0"

1' - 3"

4' - 0"

SW Stacey Williams

1' - 0"

ACT 400-Senior Projects

C1 A- 204

Coffeeshop- North 1" = 1'-0"

Adj. Shelves Beyond Shown Dashed

3' - 4"

Covered Ruber Base

4' - 9"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Acrillic Splash Gaurd

Aluminum Bar Pull 4" Back Splash

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

Undercover Refrigerator

A Millwork Project number Date

Kickspace

Drawn by

A1 A- 204

Checked by

Coffeeshop- South 1" = 1'-0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 204 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Backsplash at Walls

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 503

A- 305 PRECAST CONCRETE MOLDING

CMU WALL ---

Stacey Williams

D SCUPPER

12K5

CMU WALL

5" INT. WALL 6" PLUMBING WALL

Mech. 207

CMU WALL

Mens Restroom 206

Lady's Restroom 205

Stairs 106

ACT 400-Senior Projects

12K5

ELEVATOR

DOWN SPOUT

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B BRICK ON INSULATED CMU

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

SPLASH BLOCK

PIT

A A1

A- 503

A- 305

Building Sections Project number

A1 A- 301

Hor.- Stair/Elevator/Office 1/2" = 1'-0"

Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 301 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Elevator 208

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Stacey Williams

D 1' 6 'Crown Molding

Window Head A1 A- 305 EPDM membrane Common Bond Brick Veneer 2" Air Space Precast Concrete Molding

Roof 28' - 0"

Insulation Scupper CMU

Window Pediment 3" Rigid insulation 12K5 open- web steel joist @ 6' 0" O.C. Single hung aluminum window

Stone Quoin

Bar 201

Metal decking

20L

20K

20J

107B

12K5

Second Floor 18' - 0"

12K5

Wall Sweep

Window Pediment Single hung aluminum window

Balcony 9' - 0"

101A

10G

Window Sill

First Floor Plan 1' - 6" 556981

Grade 0' - 0"

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A A1

Building Section

A- 305

A1 A- 302

Hor.- Bathrroms/ Stage area 3/8" = 1'-0"

Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 302 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

20F

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Single hung aluminum window

3" Cast concrete

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

A1 A- 305 Precast Concrete Molding

Precast Conrete Molding

Insulated Concrete Roof

Bar 201

Precast Concrete Quoin

20M 20L

20K

20J

20I

20H

Brick on Insulated CMU

Second Floor 18' - 0"

Stage

Precast Concrete Quoin Gyb. Board on CMU A1 A- 504

Brick on Insulated CMU

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Balcony 9' - 0"

10I 101A

10H

107A

10G

10F

First Floor Plan 1' - 6" 556981

Grade 0' - 0"

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

T.O. Footing -2' - 6" B.O. Footing -3' - 6"

A A1 A- 303

A Buildig Section

Hor.- Entrance/ staircase 3/8" = 1'-0"

A1 A- 305 Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 303 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

12K5

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Roof 28' - 0"

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

D A1 A- 503

A1 A- 305

INSULATED CONCRETE ROOF

PRECAST CONCRETE MOLDING

CMU WALL

SCUPPER

PRECAST CONCRETE QUOIN

Coffee Shop 203

COMMON BOND BRICK

C DOWN SPOUT

207A ELEVATOR DOOR

Second Floor 18' - 0"

FLAGSTONE ON INSULATED CMU

GYB. BOARD ON CMU AWNING

AWNING

B Balcony 9' - 0"

DOOR TRIM 4 7/8" GYP. BOARD WALL

ELEVATOR DOOR

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

Grade 0' - 0"

A1 A- 503

T.O. Footing -2' - 6"

A1 A- 305

A Building Section

A1 A- 304

Hor.- Study lobby 3/8" = 1'-0"

Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 304 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

BRICK ON INSULATED CMU

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Roof 28' - 0"

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 301

A- 304

A- 302

A- 303

SW Stacey Williams

4 7/8" INT. WALL

Coffee Shop 203

ACT 400-Senior Projects

5"INT. WALL

C 20M

20K

Bar 201 PASTRY CASE

Second Floor 18' - 0"

20 BG JOIST 6' O.C. NEWEL POST

BALCONY RAILING

AWNING BALCONY RAILING

Balcony 9' - 0"

A- 505 RAILING

TROFFER LIGHT

NEWEL POST

BRICK ON INSULATED CMU

Storage 102

10K

10J

10I

104A

101A

B 4 7/8" GYB. WALL

B First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

STRINGER

SPLASH BLOCK

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Grade 0' - 0"

A- 301

A- 304

A- 302

A- 303

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Building Section Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 305 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Roof 28' - 0"

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

2 1/2" MTL. STUD WALL

5/8"GYP. BOARD

2 1/2" MTL. STUD WALL

2 1/2" MTL. STUD BOX BEAN HEADER

BLANKET INSULATION

Stacey Williams

5/8" GYP. BOARD JOINT PROTECTION

WOOD TRIM

JOINT PROTECTION

INSULATED ROOF

WOOD DOOR

Roof 28' - 0"

1"X4" WOOD TRIM WOOD FRAME DOOR HEAD WOOD DOOR

ACT 400-Senior Projects

20BG JOIST 8" CMU BOND BEAM

Second Floor 18' - 0"

JOINT PRTECTION

TRANSOME FRAME

GLAZING

REINFOCRED 8" CMU BLOCK

ALUMINUM DOOR HEADER

JOINT PROTECTION

DOOR FRAME

ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCE

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B CMU WALL

2'X4' ACT CEILING

GLAZING GLAZING THRESHOLD

B2 A- 306

Stair Case Door Head Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

B3 A- 306

Balcony 9' - 0"

Stair Case Door Jamb Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

C1 A-306

B2 A-306

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Interior Wall Sections

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

Project number

Grade 0' - 0"

Date Drawn by Checked by

A3 A- 306

Interior Wall Section- Fire Escape 1/2" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B2 B3 A- 306

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 306 5

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

CONCRETE MOLDING

Stacey Williams

D Roof 28' - 0"

ACT 400-Senior Projects

C Second Floor 18' - 0"

WALL SWEEP

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B Balcony 9' - 0"

B1 A-307

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

First Floor Plan 1' - 6" Grade 0' - 0"

A Exterior Wall Sections

T.O. Footing -2' - 6"

Project number Date

B.O. Footing -3' - 6"

Drawn by Checked by

A4 A- 307

Exterior- Double Door Entrance 1/2" = 1'-0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 307 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

---

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

IMPORTANT NOTES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS BY OTHERS 1.

PIT/OVERHEAD REQUIREMENTS

STEEL SAFETY BEAM PROVISIONS FOR A MINIMUM NET LIVE LOAD OF 5000# (2268 KG.) PER ELEVATOR. NOT 3 BY OTIS

SPEED

TOTAL CLEAR HEIGHT INCLUDING BEAM (NOTE A) (SEE PIT/OVERHEAD REQUIREMENTS)

J (TOTAL CLEAR HEIGHT UNDER SAFETY BEAM) (NOTE A) (SEE PIT/OVERHEAD REQUIREMENTS)

R.O. = CL. OPNG. + 10" (NOTE #6) 254

4'-0" 1219 5'-0" 1524 NOTE B 6'-0" 1829

7'-0" 2134

7'-6" 2286

13'-0" 3962 13'-3" 4039 13'-0" 3962 13'-3" 4039 13'-0" 3962 13'-3" 4039 13'-0" 3962 13'-3" 4039 13'-0" 3962 13'-3" 4039

12'-8" 3860 12'-11" 3937 12'-8" 3860 12'-11" 3937 12'-8" 3860 12'-11" 3937 12'-8" 3860 12'-11" 3937 12'-8" 3860 12'-11" 3937

14'-7" 4445

15'-7" 4750

16'-7" 5055

17'-7" 5359

18'-1" 5512

* MAX RISE MAY VARY BASED ON THE WEIGHT OF YOUR CAR, CONSULT YOUR LOCAL OTIS PERSONNEL FOR MORE DETAILS.

8'-0" AVAIL. W/ 9'-7" CAB 2438 2921

8'-0" CAB 2438 (NOTE A)

7'-0" CL. OPNG. 2134

CL OF CL TO (MAX.) SPACING RAIL BRACKETS OR INSERTS SEE CHART 11'-3" 3429 (NOTE A)

TOP FLR.

25'-1" 7645 24'-6" 7468 27'-1" 8255 26'-6" 8077 28'-1" 8560 27'-6" 8382 29'-9" 9068 29'-2" 8890 30'-2" 9195 29'-7" 9017

FLOOR NO.

TOTAL RISE

FLOOR HEIGHT

STAGE LENGTH FORMULAS 1ST STAGE (SOLID STAGE) TELESCOPIC SECTION LENGTH = (TOTAL RISE + TOP RUNBY + BOTTOM RUNBY)/2 2ND STAGE TELESCOPIC SECTION LENGTH = (TOTAL RISE + TOP RUNBY + BOTTOM RUNBY)/2 P/C BOTTOM CLEARANCE = 1.0"(25mm)

FINISH FLOOR

13/16" 20

SILL ASSEMBLY (BY OTIS) GROUTING IF REQ'D. (BY OTHERS)

TOTAL RISE

GROUT STOP SILL LINE FRONT WALL LINE DOOR SPACE = 3.56"

DETAIL "A" ADEQUATE SUPPORT AT ALL FASTENING POINTS OF ENTRANCE ASSEMBLY REQUIRED. (NOT BY OTIS)

14'-8" 4470

CUTOUTS (NOTE #20)

DETAIL "A"

LVM 2500T 2 STAGE HYDRAULIC

BOTTOM FLR.

Passenger Model 2500 lbs. @ 100 / 125 F.P.M. @ 0.50 / 0.64 m/s 1134 kg Simplex Collective

(NOTES #14)

3'-0" 914

PIT

HYDRAULIC PIPE TO COMFORM TO ASTM A106, GRADE B, SEAMLESS. DIMENSIONAL DATA ON LAYOUT COMPLIES WITH ASME A17.1 AND/OR LOCAL CODE.

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Elevator Detail Project number Date Drawn by

UNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS ELEVATOR

Checked by

SECTIONAL ELEVATION 1

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 501 2

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

PIT

(CYLINDER COLLAPSED HEIGHT)

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

100 F.P.M. 0.50 m/s 125 F.P.M. 0.64 m/s 100 F.P.M. 0.50 m/s 125 F.P.M. 0.64 m/s 100 F.P.M. 0.50 m/s 125 F.P.M. 0.64 m/s 100 F.P.M. 0.50 m/s 125 F.P.M. 0.64 m/s 100 F.P.M. 0.50 m/s 125 F.P.M. 0.64 m/s

TOTAL CLEAR HEIGHT (MIN)(NOTE A) MAX TOTAL RISE PER INCLUDING J PIT SHOWN* @ PLUNGER BEAM

J+BH+2 (BH=BEAM HEIGHT) (BEAM NOT BY OTIS)

3'-11 11/16" 1211

2" 51

Stacey Williams

ACT 400-Senior Projects

PROPERLY FRAMED AND ENCLOSED LEGAL HOISTWAY INCLUDING VENTING AS REQUIRED BY THE GOVERNING CODE AND SAFETY BEAM AS SHOWN. 2. ADEQUATE SUPPORT FOR GUIDE RAIL FASTENINGS NOT TO EXCEED THE VERTICAL SPACING SHOWN ON THE RAIL BRACKET CHART. SEPERATOR BEAMS WHERE REQUIRED. 3. A) PROTECTION FROM FALLS (OSHA 1926.502 B (1-3)): FREESTANDING REMOVABLE BARRICADE AT EACH HOISTWAY OPENING AT EACH FLOOR REQUIRED. BARRICADES SHALL BE 42" HIGH, WITH MID-RAIL AND KICK BOARD, AND WITHSTAND 200 LBS OF VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL PRESSURE. B) PROTECTION FROM FALLING OBJECTS (OSHA 1926.502(j)): HOISTWAY PROTECTION FROM FALLING DEBRIS AND OTHER TRADES MATERIALS PROVIDED BY EITHER 1) AN 8 FOOT SCREENING/MESH IN FRONT OF ALL ELEVATOR ENTRANCES OR 2) BY A SECURED/CONTROLLED ACCESS TO ALL ELEVATOR LOBBIES (LOCK AND KEY) WITH POSTED NOTICE "ONLY ELEVATOR PERSONNEL BEYOND THIS PROTECTION". 3A AND 3B CAN BE INTEGRATED SYSTEMS. HOISTWAY BARRICADES AND SCREENING SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED, MAINTAINED AND REMOVED BY OTHERS. 4. ALL CUTTING OR PATCHING TO ACCOMMODATE ELEVATOR INSTALLATION. 5. HOISTWAY WALLS ARE TO BE DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIRED FIRE RATING INCLUDING WHERE PENETRATED BY ELEVATOR FIXTURE BOXES, AND TO INCLUDE ADEQUATE FASTENINGS TO HOISTWAY ASSEMBLIES. PROVIDE ADEQUATE SUPPORT AT ALL FASTENING POINTS OF EACH ENTRANCE. PROVIDE PLUMB VERTICAL SURFACES FOR ENTRANCES AND SILL SUPPORTS, ONE ABOVE THE OTHER, AND SQUARE WITH THE HOISTWAY. FINISH FLOOR AND GROUT, IF REQUIRED, BETWEEN DOOR FRAMES TO SILL LINE. A HORIZONTAL SUPPORT IS TO BE PROVIDED 1'-0" [305mm] ABOVE THE CLEAR OPENING AT THE TOP LANDING TO SUPPORT THE DOOR FRAME ASSEMBLY. IF FLOOR HEIGHTS EXCEED 12'-0" [3657], A HORIZONTAL SUPPORT IS TO BE PROVIDED 1'-0" [3657] ABOVE THE CLEAR OPENING. IF TRANSOMS ARE FURNISHED, COORDINATE HORIZONTAL BEAM SUPPORT WITH CONSTRUCTION SUPERINTENDENT. 6. FOR PRECAST OR POURED CONCRETE WALLS, PROVIDE THE ROUGH OPENING FOR HOISTWAY AS SHOWN ON LAYOUT, AND ANY GROUTING AROUND ENTRANCE FRAMES IF REQ'D. 7. SUITABLE MACHINE ROOM WITH LEGAL ACCESS AND MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 7'-6" (2286mm) TO BE PROVIDED. MACHINE ROOM TEMPERATURE MAINTAINED BETWEEN 60째 & 100째 F (15.5째 & 37.8째 C). RELATIVE HUMIDITY NOT TO EXCEED 95% NON-CONDENSING. FOR HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING REQUIREMENTS OTHER THAN THOSE SHOWN ABOVE REFER TO OTIS CONFIRMATION OF POWER SUPPLY FORM. 8. A SEPARATE BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR SUITABLE LIGHT FIXTURE(S) AND CONVENIENCE OUTLETS, WITH G.F.I., IN THE MACHINE ROOM WITH THE LIGHT SWITCH LOCATED ADJACENT TO THE LOCK JAMB SIDE OF THE MACHINE ROOM DOOR. 9. FOR EACH ELEVATOR, A THREE PHASE ELECTRICAL FEEDER SYSTEM WITH A SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR AND A SINGLE PHASE 120 VOLT LIGHTING SUPPLY. EACH WITH A FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER, LOCATED IN THE MACHINE ROOM AND WIRED TO EACH CONTROLLER. 10. IN THE PIT, A SEPARATE BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR CONVENIENCE G.F.C.I. OUTLET & LIGHT FIXTURE WITH LIGHT SWITCH ADJACENT TO THE PIT LADDER. 11. ALL ELECTRIC POWER FOR TOOLS, LIGHT, HOIST, ETC., DURING ERECTION AS WELL AS ELECTRIC CURRENT FOR STARTING AND ADJUSTING THE ELEVATOR. 12. DRY PIT REINFORCED TO SUSTAIN VERTICAL FORCES OF UP TO: 17,492/79 LBS/KN AT EACH BUFFER AND 3,700/17 LBS/KN AT THE CYLINDER HEAD. THE ACCUMULATION OF WATER MUST BE PREVENTED. 13. A FIXED VERTICAL STEEL LADDER TO PIT EXTENDING 4'-0" (1219mm) ABOVE THE SILL OF THE BOTTOM ENTRANCE AS LOCATED IN THE PLAN VIEW. LADDER WIDTH AND PROJECTION FROM WALL PER LOCAL CODE. IF PIT DEPTH IS GREATER THAN 9'-10" (3000mm) [13'-9" (4191mm) WITH NO FLOOR BELOW BOTTOM LANDING], A PIT ACCESS DOOR IS REQUIRED. 14. PIT FLOOR BENEATH CYLINDERS AND BUFFER TO BE FLAT AND LEVEL WITHIN 1/8" (3mm) FULL WIDTH OF HOISTWAY. 15. ELEVATOR CAB FLOORING MUST NOT EXCEED A THICKNESS OF 5/16" (8mm). 16. ONE (1) DEDICATED OUTSIDE TELEPHONE LINE TO THE ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM MUST BE FURNISHED. TELEPHONE CONNECTIONS TO EACH CONTROLLER. TELEPHONE INSTRUMENT BY OTHERS. 17. ALL 125 VOLT, 15 OR 20 AMP, SINGLE PHASE DUPLEX RECEPTACLES INSTALLED IN PITS, MACHINE ROOMS OR MACHINERY SPACES, SHALL BE OF THE GROUND-FAULT-CIRCUIT-INTERRUPTER TYPE. 18. SMOKE DETECTORS, LOCATED AS REQUIRED, WITH WIRING FROM THE SENSING DEVICES TO A CONTROLLER DESIGNATED BY OTIS. FOR EACH GROUP OF ELEVATORS, PROVIDE A NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT REPRESENTING THE SMOKE DETECTOR AT THE DESIGNATED RETURN LANDING. FOR EACH GROUP OF ELEVATORS, PROVIDE A NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT REPRESENTING ALL SMOKE DETECTORS LOCATED IN LOBBIES, HOISTWAYS OR MACHINE ROOMS, BUT NOT THE SMOKE DETECTOR AT THE DESIGNATED RETURN LANDING (SEE ABOVE) OR THE SMOKE DETECTORS AS DESCRIBED IN A & B BELOW: A) IF A SMOKE DETECTOR IS LOCATED IN THE HOISTWAY AT OR BELOW THE LOWER OF THE TWO RECALL LANDINGS, IT SHALL BE WIRED TO ACTIVATE THE SAME NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT AS THE SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATED IN THE LOBBY AT THE LOWER OF THE TWO RECALL LANDINGS. B) IF MACHINE ROOMS ARE LOCATED AT THE DESIGNATED RETURN LANDING, THE SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATED THEREIN SHALL BE WIRED TO ACTIVATE THE SAME NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT AS THE SMOKE DETECTOR AT THE DESIGNATED LANDING. FOR A SINGLE UNIT, OR GROUP OF ELEVATORS HAVING ONE COMMON MACHINE ROOM AND ONE COMMON HOISTWAY, PROVIDE ONE ADDITIONAL NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT REPRESENTING ALL MACHINE ROOM AND HOISTWAY SMOKE DETECTORS. IF THE GROUP CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE HOISTWAY, AND HOISTWAY SMOKE DETECTORS ARE INSTALLED, OR IF THE GROUP HAS MORE THAN ONE MACHINE ROOM, PROVIDE ONE ADDITIONAL NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT FOR EACH ELEVATOR. THE CONTACT IS TO REPRESENT THE SMOKE DETECTORS IN THE MACHINE ROOM FOR THAT PARTICULAR ELEVATOR, AND ANY SMOKE DETECTORS IN THE HOISTWAY CONTAINING THAT PARTICULAR ELEVATOR. C) PROVIDE CLASS "ABC" FIRE EXTINGUISHER IN MACHINE ROOMS. 19. IF SPRINKLERS ARE INSTALLED IN THE HOISTWAY, MACHINE ROOM, OR MACHINERY SPACES, THE LOCAL CODE MAY REQUIRE A MEANS TO AUTOMATICALLY DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY OF THE AFFECTED ELEVATOR PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF WATER (CONFIRM WITH THE LOCAL CODE OFFICIAL). SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL NOT BE USED TO ACTIVATE SPRINKLERS IN HOISTWAYS, MACHINE ROOMS, OR MACHINERY SPACES OR TO DISCONNECT THE MAIN LINE POWER SUPPLY. 20. TWO (2) 6" X 6" (152mm x 152mm) CUTOUTS ARE REQUIRED (NOT BY OTIS). THE ACTUAL LOCATION OF THE CUTOUTS FOR THE TO AND FROM OIL PIPE AND ELECTRICAL TROUGH WILL VARY DEPENDENT UPON MACHINE ROOM LOCATION AND CONFIGURATION. 21. BUILDING RAIL SUPPORTS (NOT BY OTIS) SHALL BE DESIGNED TO SUSTAIN THE HORIZONTAL RAIL FORCES WITH A MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION OF 1/8" (3mm).

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

C L BUFFER HALL BUTTON

4'-2" 1270

C 3 1/2" 89 2 1/2" 64

10 1/2" 267 1/2" 13

3 1/2" 89

C L 6'-10 3/8" 2092

HALL FIXTURE LOCATION RIGHT HAND AS SHOWN CENTER OPENING AS SHOWN LEFT HAND OPPOSITE

RAIL FORCE & BRACKET DETAIL SEISMIC ZONE R1 R2

ZONE 0 OR 1 182# 809 N 59# 262 N

MAXIMUM BRACKET SPACING

ZONE 2 851# 3785 N 426# 1893 N

ZONE 3 OR ABOVE 1702# 7570 N 851# 3785 N

14'-0'' 4267mm

1. HALL BUTTON AT ALL FLOORS 2. OPTIONAL HALL POSITION INDICATOR OR HALL LANTERN (TYPICAL LOCATION WITH 7'-0" / 2134 OPENING).

2 1/2" 64

8'-4" CL. HSTWY. & PIT (1 ELEV.) 2540 17'-0" CL. HSTWY. & PIT (2 ELEVS.) 5182

NOTE A: INCREASE DIMENSION BY 19"/483 FOR A 9'-7" CAB. IF A FALL HAZARD EXISTS, INCREASE DIMENSION BY 1"/127 FOR AN 8'-0" CAB AND 20"/610 FOR A 9'-7" CAB.

25'-8" CL. HSTWY. & PIT (3 ELEVS.) 7823

MACHINE ROOM IS LOCATED ADJACENT TO HOISTWAY @ LEFT SIDE ADJACENT TO HOISTWAY @ REAR ADJACENT TO HOISTWAY @ RIGHT SIDE REMOTE DISTANCE FROM HOISTWAY MACHINE ROOM LEVEL

34'-4" CL. HSTWY. & PIT (4 ELEVS.) 10465

PLAN VIEW WITH RIGHT HAND OPENING

NOTE B: REQUIRED FOR ONTARIO.

MINIMUM CLEAR MACHINE ROOM DIMENSIONS: 5'-9" / 1753 X 7'-4" / 2236

DOOR SIZE IS 3'-0" / 914 X 7'-0" / 2134 FOR MULTI-CAR GROUP MACHINE ROOM SIZES, SEE MACHINE ROOM LAYOUT PAGE IN OASIS.

SEE NOTE G

2'-5" 737 1'-7" 483

B NOTE D: FOR SEISMIC ZONES 2 AND GREATER, INCREASE HOISTWAY WIDTH BY 2"/51 FOR EACH CAR (ADDED EQUALLY TO EACH SIDE OF CLEAR HOISTWAY). NOTE E: HOISTWAY FACIA IS NOT SELF-SUPPORTING FOR LONG, CONTINUOUS RUNS VOID OF ENTRANCES. ADEQUATE SUPPORT FOR THE FACIA MUST BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS.

C.O.P.

4'-2" 1270

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

3'-6" CL OPNG 1066 5'-2" ROUGH OPNG 1575 (NOTE #6) 6'-8" MIN CAR INSIDE 2032 7'-4" D.B.G. 2235

3'-11 1/2" 1207 3'-1 1/2" 953

LADDER & LIGHT SWITCH IN PIT (NOT BY OTIS) (NOTE 10, 13 & G)

R2 Vy

R1 Vx

ACT 400-Senior Projects

C.O.P.

8" 203

3'-6" 1066

6" 153

1 C L

L2 L4

L1 L3

R2 Vy

2 2'-10 11/16" 1'-1" 881 330 4'-3" MIN CAR INSIDE 1295 5'-9" CL HOISTWAY & PIT 1753

CL PLUNGER

CUTOUTS (NOTE #20)

CL BUFFER 3'-6" CL OPNG 1066 5'-2" ROUGH OPNG 1575 (NOTE #6)

NOTE F: MACHINE ROOM SIZE MAY VARY WITH LOCAL CODE. CONSULT YOUR OTIS REPRESENTATIVE.

HALL BUTTON 2'-5" 737 1'-7" 483

NOTE G:

CENTER OPENING DIRECTIONAL ARROW INDICATE NORTH FOR HOISTWAY AND MACHINE ROOM PLAN.

IN AREAS REQUIRING COMPLIANCE TO ASME A17.1a-2002 INCREASE HOISTWAY & PIT WIDTH BY 2.5" EACH SIDE (5" OVERALL) OR PROVIDE CUTOUT FOR PIT LADDER: (CUTOUT = 26"W x 2.5"D x (PIT DEPTH + 48")H). CONSULT YOUR LOCAL OTIS REPRESENTATIVE TO CONFIRM YOUR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS AND LADDER LOCATION.

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

LVM 2500T 2 STAGE HYDRAULIC

Passenger Model 2500 lbs. @ 100 / 125 F.P.M. @ 0.50 / 0.64 m/s 1134 kg Simplex Collective

HYDRAULIC PIPE TO COMFORM TO ASTM A106, GRADE B, SEAMLESS. DIMENSIONAL DATA ON LAYOUT COMPLIES WITH ASME A17.1 AND/OR LOCAL CODE.

Elevator Detail Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 502 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Stacey Williams

D C L CAR RAILS & INSERTS

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

A1 A- 301

0' - 1"

1' - 0"

Roof 28' - 0"

4' - 0"

Monolithic Stair Dimensions 1" = 1'-0"

C NOSING BAR #4 SLIP RESISTANT ABRASIVE ON STEPS AND LANDING

Second Floor 18' - 0"

Balcony 9' - 0"

B5 A- 503

Monolithic Stair Detail 1" = 1'-0"

HAND RAIL

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

B C5 A- 503

24' - 8"

Elevator 208

Coffee Shop 203

Balcony 9' - 0" RAIL

DN B5 A- 503 0' - 8"

106B

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

8' - 5"

Stairs 106

A First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

West Stair Detail

Grade 0' - 0"

Project number Date Drawn by

Checked by

A- 301

A1 A- 503

Stair Section Fire Escape 1/2" = 1'-0"

A- 503

West Stair Case 3/8" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 503

ACT 400-Senior Projects

1' - 11"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 503 4

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A1 A- 305

NOSING BAR# 4

1' - 0"

SLIP RESISTANT ABRASSIVE ON STEPS AND LANDING

Roof 28' - 0"

A- 504

Monolithic Stair Dimension 1" = 1'-0"

A- 504

Monolithic StairS Detail 1" = 1'-0"

20H

HAND RAIL

Second Floor 18' - 0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Balcony 9' - 0"

556981

10F

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

8' - 5"

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

South Stair Detail

Grade 0' - 0" Project number Date

A1 A- 504

South Staircase Section Detail 1/2" = 1'-0"

A- 504

South Stair Case 1/2" = 1'-0"

Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

A- 504 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

20I

Stacey Williams

ACT 400-Senior Projects

0' - 1"

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

8' - 4" 10R @ 11"

5' - 10"

A1 A- 505

4' - 5"

4R @ 11"

2' - 9"

POST

BALUSTER

HAND RAIL

B4 A- 505

Balcony 9' - 0"

Balcony Stair Plan 3/8" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

A- 505 FLOOR

4" RISER A1 A- 505 2" THICK NOSING

556981 3' - 6"

POST

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

0' - 2"

STRINGER

BALUSTER

1' - 5"

WOOD RISER

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

KICKER PLATE 8" STRINGER DOUBLE HEADER

0' - 6"

WOOD TREAD

Balcony Stair Detail

First Floor Plan 1' - 6"

Project number

Grade 0' - 0"

Date Drawn by Checked by

A1 A- 505

Balcony Stair level 2 3/4" = 1'-0"

A- 505

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

Balcony Stair Level 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

A- 505 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

5' - 4"

ACT 400-Senior Projects

A- 505

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Door Schedule Mark

Description

Width

Height

Door Schedule Door Thickness Material

Finish

Fire Rating

Hardware

3' - 4"

Opening Number

101A

101B,101C,101D,106A,106B,106C

102A,103A,104A,206A,205A

6' - 11"

3' - 0"

6' - 11"

8' - 6"

3' - 6"

Storefront Door 101C Single Exterior 104A Office 105A Office 105B Mechanical 106A Single Exterior 106B Single Exterior 106C Single Exterior 107A Single Exterior 107B Single Exterior 205A Bathroom 206A Bathroom 207A Mechanical 207G Office Grand total: 14

207A

107A,107B Door Type

Double door with transome, Dbl glaze

Quantity

Size

6' 2" x 9' 0"

Single flush hollow metal door

3' 4" x 8' 6"

Single flush hollow metal door 1

3' 6" x 6' 11"

3' 0" X 6' 11"

Material

Aluminum

Finish

Flat Black

7' - 0"

0' - 3"

Aluminum

Dark Broze

1/2/3

3' - 0"

7' - 0"

0' - 2"

Aluminum

Dark Broze 2

1/2/3

3' - 0" 3' - 0" 2' - 6" 3' - 0"

7' - 0" 7' - 0" 6' - 8" 7' - 0"

0' - 2" 0' - 2" 0' - 2" 0' - 2"

Wood

Paint

6/7

3' - 0"

7' - 0"

3' - 0"

Aluminum

2 2 2 Dark Broze 2

1/2/3

0' - 2"

Aluminum

Dark Broze 2

1/2/3

7' - 0"

0' - 2"

Aluminum

Dark Broze 2

1/2/3

3' - 0"

7' - 0"

0' - 2"

Aluminum

Dark Broze 2

1/2/3

3' - 0"

7' - 0"

0' - 2"

Aluminum

Dark Broze 2

1/2/3

3' - 0" 3' - 0" 2' - 6" 3' - 0"

7' - 0" 7' - 0" 6' - 8" 7' - 0"

0' - 2" 0' - 2" 0' - 2" 0' - 2"

Wood Wood Wood

Paint Paint Paint

4/5/6 4/5/6 6/7

2 2 2 2

Stacey Williams

C HARDWARE SCHEDULE # Description 1 Exterior Door closer 2 Exterior Door Pull 3 Exterior Door Panic Bar 4 5

Bathroom Door Pull Bathroom Door Push

6 7

Room Number

Room Name

Area

Floor Finish

Room Schedule Base Finish

Wall Finish

Ceiling Finish

Comments Mark

101 Book Store 102 Storage 103 Men's Restroom 104 Men's Restroom

106 Stairs 107 Stairs 203 Coffee Shop 204 Corridor 202 201 208 207 205 206 105 Grand total: 15

Storage Bar Elevator Mech. Lady's Restroom Mens Restroom Women's Restroom

Not Enclosed 304 SF Not Placed 58 SF

Laminated wood

4" Rubber

Paint

Tile Tile Laminated wood

Paint Paint Paint

198 SF Not Enclosed 857 SF 93 SF

Stained concrete Stained concrete

4" Rubber 4" Rubber 4" Wood Base 4" Rubber 4" Rubber

188 SF 2140 SF 52 SF 61 SF 113 SF 113 SF 56 SF 4232 SF

Unfinished Tile Cork Unfinished Tile Tile

10A

Tile Laminated wood

2'x 4' ACT Ceiling 2'x 4' ACT Ceiling 2'x 4' ACT Ceiling

Paint Paint

20C

4" Rubber 4" Wood Base 4" Rubber 4" Rubber

Paint Paint

20A

Paint Paint

20M

4" Rubber 4" Rubber 4" Rubber

Paint Paint Paint

20L 2'x 4' ACT Ceiling 2'x 4' ACT Ceiling 20J

20G

20E

20D

A 20B

20F

20K

10G

Serial # LCN4111695 386NL33AUS26D 88EO26D695

4 4

RO588ZLW490HO RS05AAZLW490DP

RS06BAA09609

210KSP28695

Glazing Type

Mark

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10H

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10I

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10J

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10E

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10D

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10C

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10K

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10L

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

20I

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

20H

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10F

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

10B

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Window Schedule R.O. Description Width Height Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum Double Hung Aluminum

Glazing Type

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

B 3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

A 3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

Double

Schedules Project number Date

Double

Drawn by Checked by

3' - 4"

7' - 0"

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

Double

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Office Door Knob

10B

Door Kick

Qty. 8 8 8

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Frame

Single door with transome, Dbl glaze

6' - 0"

ACT 400-Senior Projects

101A

A- 601 4

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Stacey Williams

ACT 400-Senior Projects

C S

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A First Floor Electrical Plan Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

E- 101 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Stacey Williams

ACT 400-Senior Projects

S DN

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Second Floor Electrical Plan Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

E- 102 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

SW Stacey Williams

5 ROUND

ACT 400-Senior Projects

5 ROUND

12 ROUND

5 ROUND

22 ROUND

12 ROUND

5 ROUND

12 ROUND

B 15

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A First Floor Mechanical Plan Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

M- 101 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Stacey Williams

6 ROUND 6

10 ROUND

12 ROUND

6 ROUND 15

12 ROUND

8 ROUND 12 ROUND 15

DN 12

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

ACT 400-Senior Projects

B 15

556981

stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Second Floor Mechanical Plan Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

M- 102 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Scale

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Stacey Williams

First Floor Plumbing Plan 3/8" = 1'-0"

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

ACT 400-Senior Projects

Second Floor Plumbing Plan 1/4" = 1'-0"

556981 stacey.d.williams@eagles.usm.edu

A Plumbing Plan Project number Date Drawn by Checked by

2012 28 Feburary 2012 Author Checker

P- 101 1

PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK STUDENT PRODUCT

Scale